An analysis of the Pomak language based on fieldwork research data
Server A. Kehaya
A dissertation submitted to the Department of Theoretical and Applied Linguistics, School of English, Faculty of Philosophy, Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, Greece, in partial fulfilment of the requirements for the degree of the Master of Arts in Theoretical and Applied Linguistics.
Supervisor: Prof. Dr. Elizabeth Mela-Athanasopoulou
December 2015 II
For all Pomaks,
II III
CONTENTS
Dedication……………………………………………………………………………II Contents…………………………………………………………………………..III-V Acknowledgements…………………………………………………………………VI Photos and Maps……………………………………………………………….VII-IX List of Abbreviations………………………………………………………………...X Abstract……………………………………………………………………………...XI 1. INTRODUCTION……………………………………………………………...1-9 Who are the Pomak people?...……………………………………………1-3 What is Pomak?...... 3-4 History of the Pomak Language………………………………………….4-6 Pomak dialects……………………………………………………………..6-7 Proposed Pomak alphabet………………………………………………...7-9
2. THE PROPOSAL, aims and methodology of this thesis………………….10-18 Literature Review………………………………………………………10-11 Methodology.……………………………………………………………12-13 Recording details………………………………………………………..13-15 Native seaker participants…………………………………………………16 Research objective……………………………………………………...... 17
3. PHONOLOGY……………………………………………………...... 18-36 3.1. The Sounds of Pomak…………………………………………………..18-24 Vowels……………………………………………………………18-20 Comments on the vowel system………………………………...20-21 Consonants……………………………………………………….21-24 3.2. Phonological processes…………………………………………………24-34 Vowel Change...………………………………………………….24-26 Consonant Elision……………………………………………….26-27 L – vocalization……….………………………………..………..27-28 Deaffrication of tʃ to ʃ……………………………………………28-29 Affrication of ʒ to dʒ…………………………………………….29-30 Final stop devoicing……………………………………………..30-31 Vowel alternation………………………………………………..31-32 Consonant alternation………………………...... 32 Vowel syncope…………………………………...... 33 3.3. Word Stress…………………………………...... 34-36
4. MORPHOLOGY…………………………………………………...... 37-70 4.1. NOUNS………………………………………………………………….38-47 Augmentation and diminution………………………………….38-39
III IV
Derived Nouns………………………………………………………40 Deverbal Nouns……………………………………………………..40 Deadjectival Nouns……………………………………………...40-42 Inflectional Noun Morphemes………………………………….42-45 Plurality………………………………………………………….45-47 4.2. ADJECTIVES & ADVERBS………………………………………….47-53 Denominal Adjectives…………………………………………...... 48 Adverbs…………………………………………………………..49-50 Determiners…………………………………...... 50-53 4.3. VERBS ……………………...... 53-66 Denominal Verbs……………………………………………………54 Deadjectival Verbs………………………………………………54-55 Finite verb forms: Tense and Aspect…………………………..55-56 The Tenses: Tense formation and Tense usage…………………...56 The Imperfective (Progressive) & Perfective Aspects...... 56 Present Simple………………………...... 57 Past Continuous or Imperfect Past………………………..58 Past Simple or Factual Past (Aorist)…...... 58-59 Future Continuous……………………………………...59-60 Future Simple……………………………...... 60 Future Perfect Continuous…………...... 61-62 Future Perfect Simple………………...... 62 Present Perfect Continuous…………………………….62-64 Present Perfect Simple – Preterite…………………….64-65 Past Perfect Continuous…………………...... 65 Past Perfect Simple – Pluperfect…………...... 66 4.4. MODALITY…………………………………………………………….67-70 Imperative………………………………………………………..67-68 Subjunctive………………………………………………………68-70
5. BORROWINGS………………………………………………………...... 71-80 Turkish and Greek borrowings….………………………………..71-72 Greek loan words in the recordings…...... 72-74 Turkish loan words in the recordings…………………………….74-78 Loan words of different origin in the recordings………………...78-80
6. SYNTAX……………………………………………………………………..81-92 The Sentence……………………………………………………….81-84 Word Order ……………………………………………………….84-86 Predicates……………………………………...... 86-88 Subject verb non-agreement……………………………………...88-89 Clitics……………………………………………………………….89-91 Clitic doubling………………………………...... 91-92
7. CONCLUSION……………………………………………………………...93-95 8. REFERENCES……………………………………………………………..96-100
IV V
9. APPENDIX ..………………………………………………………...... 101-222 Recording 1…………………………………………………………...101-109 Recording 2…………………………………………………………...110-127 Recording 3…………………………………………………………...128-136 Recording 4…………………………………………………………...137-158 Recording 5…………………………………………………………...159-174 Recording 6…………………………………………………………...175-192 Recording 7…………………………………………………………...193-212 Recording 8…………………………………………………………...213-222
V VI
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank my parents for providing me with both material and immaterial support throught my life, the Pomak people that very gladly obliged to help me by providing me with invaluable recorded data, and Prof. Dr. Elizabeth Mela-
Athanasopoulou for agreeing to supervise this dissertation and for her unwavering support throughout this endeavour. This dissertation is only the stepping stone for further research.
VI VII
PHOTOS AND MAPS
Fig. 1. Map of Pomak-speaking villages of Xanthi by N.Th. Kokkas.
Fig. 2. The author in front of signpost of a village in which a recording took place.
VII VIII
Fig. 3. Pomak speaker in a recording process.
Fig. 4. Pomak speakers in a recording process.
VIII IX
Fig. 5. Pomak speakers in a recording process.
Fig. 6. The author with Pomak speakers in a recording process.
IX X
List of Abbreviations A addressee ADJ. adjective ADV. adverb AUX. auxiliary CONJ. conjunction D distal DAT. dative DEF. definite FEM. feminine FUT future HAB habitual IRR irrealis MSC. masculine NEG. negator NOM. nominative NTR . neuter OBJ. object OBL. oblique PL. plural PN. pronoun PR. present PRTC. participle PREP. preposition PROG. progressive QUANT. quantifier Q.PART. question particle SP. speaker SG. singular SUBJ. subjunctive
X XI
ABSTRACT
The aim of this dissertation is to present the minority language of Pomak spoken by approximately 30,000 people according to the latest national census (ELSTAT 2011) in the geographic region of Thrace and predominantly in the prefecture of Xanthi, through authentic audio recordings and to conduct a linguistic analysis based on the recorded data with particular emphasis on morphophonological and lexicosyntactic aspects. It attempts to delve into this marginally studied minority language and analyze the subtleties, complexities and some dialectal differences and similarities while providing native speaker insight and intuitions about phonological, morphological, lexical, and syntactical phenomena that appear in the recordings.
Keywords: Pomak, phonology, morphology, syntax, lexis, dialects.
XI
1
1. INTRODUCTION
Pomak is a minority language of Slavic origin spoken in the Balkan peninsula and more specifically the regions of Bulgaria, FYROM, and Turkey with the most speakers being in Greece. It is a fact that little linguistic work has been done on the
Pomak language and even less from the perspective of a native speaker of the language.
This dissertation aspires to present a morphophonological and lexicosyntactic account of the language. It is true that many past attempts to analyse and record the Pomak language did not have any scientific goal such as to research the language which remains largely unknown to the linguistic community, and even more disregarded from the vast majority of people both within Greece as well as other countries. The aim of this dissertation is to present a linguistic analysis of the minority language of Pomak in terms of phonology, morphology, lexis, and syntax, based on authentic audio recorded data from native speakers of the language.
Most of the body of work that is available on the Pomak language is either done by agenda driven non-native and native speakers, or academically and scientifically driven non-native speakers of Pomak such as Adamou (2010, 2011, 2012, 2013) and
Sandry (2013). Native speaker scientific and not agenda-driven work is scarce, if any at all. The little native-speaker work on the language is scarce and usually from people who have no tertiary education let alone an education on linguistics. The present dissertation aims to fill that gap and provide native speaker insight into the Pomak language as well as pave the way for future researchers of Pomak.
Who are the Pomak people?
Despite the present dissertation focusing on the language of Pomak, a reference to who or what the Pomaks are is unavoidable as it is the case that language shapes
1 2 identity and vice versa. Adamou claims that “Pomaks were traditionally semi-sedentary cattle breeders and farmers, living in the Rhodope Mountains” (2010:164). “Pomak as a word appears in the Slavic language meaning 'helper', derived from 'pomoci? as
'pomaci'” claims Turan (1999:70). Additionally, it is claimed that this sobriquet was given to Pomaks by their Christian fellow countrymen because during the Ottoman invasion of the Balkans, Pomaks aided the Ottomans and guided the army, and thus they were called 'pomak' (helper) (Turan, 1999:70, Eminov, 2007:9). Despite the aforementioned etymology being generally thought of as the most likely, it is dubious and ambiguous at best as colliding interests and agendas have different accounts of who and what the Pomaks are.
All conflicting accounts that follow separate trajectories as regards the origin of
Pomaks have a common denominator that of trying to portray Pomaks as ‘pure- blooded’, ‘original’, ‘true’, ‘authentic’, versions of their present populations. From decendants of Thracian tribes and Alexander the Great, to pure-blooded Bulgarians, to true Turks, the accounts are countless and all centrifugal from each other, never alligning with each other except for only stressing that Pomaks are ‘true’, ‘authentic’,
‘pure’ of something despite that something being slippery to pinpoint with accuracy and reach a conscensous on. Greek accounts hold that Pomaks are of ancient Thracian descent who “were Hellenized, Latinized (Romanized), Slavicized, Christianized, and were converted to Islam” (Seyppel, 1989:42). Bulgarian scholars claim that “[s]ince
Pomaks speak a Bulgarian dialect with numerous ancient Bulgarian constructions,… they must be of Bulgarian origin” (Eminov, 2007:9). Turkish scholars focus on the religious common denominator and claim Pomaks “as “pure-blooded” Turks, representing the oldest Turkish population in Europe” (Seyppel, 1989:43).
2 3
Each account claims to be the truth and discredits the rest as nothing but mere machinations that have ulterior motives of distabilisation, or of usurpation of a people.
All this power game done in the name of Pomaks has somewhat made the Pomaks themselves more stoic as regards their nature and origin. Most Pomaks nowadays will claim they are just Pomak despite not even knowing what that actually stands for. The identity of Pomaks has been such a divisive topic and has only cost Pomaks such segregation and a feeling of being unwanted, pariahs in their own lands, that most are simply content with what they are at the present which, generally alligns with no country’s version despite there being vocal supporters of most versions particularly the
Greek and Turkish ones. If experience has taught anything, it is probably for the best that Pomaks claim to be a bit of everything and nothing at the same time as no country has benefitted Pomaks much. Michail claims that “their ‘locality’ has been the only commonly accepted referent of the Pomak identity, including kin ties, language, religion and customs” (2003:5). The fact that being ‘local’ was not associated with any connotations and is the most neutral term devoid of direct associations with “any ethnic attribute, it seemed to be the most practical way to avoid discussions on ethnic identification, which created much trouble for them in the past” (Michail, 2003:5).
What is Pomak?
Pomak is an oral South East Slavic minority language lacking its own writing system or orthography and spoken by insular societies of people in the Balkan countries and most predominantly, in Greece and Bulgaria and even less so in Turkey and other
Balkan countries. Turan claims that the Pomak language is “a Slavic dialect very close to Bulgarian except Serbian Pomaks, who speak Serbo-Croatian” (1999:69). Aarbakke mentions that Pomak is “a purer and more archaic Bulgarian” (Aarbakke, 2012:153) whilst Pillbrow says that Greek Pomaks “speak what Bulgarians would maintain is
3 4 reasonably pure Bulgarian” (1997:68). According to Manova “[t]he international scholarly literature refers to them broadly as Slavspeaking Muslims, whereas Bulgarian dialectologists define them clearly as speakers of the Rhodopean dialects of the
Bulgarian language” (Manova, 2011:262).
Yet, the fact remains, however unpleasant it may be for some, that it is a minority language distinct from Bulgarian, Turkish and Greek despite objectively having many borrowings from those three languages. According to Sandry, “Pomak, even in the eyes of those who claim it is the only language they can use, enjoys little prestige” (2013:28). “Some Pomaks have already abandoned their language while others are currently giving it up because they believe that it has no future and that proper knowledge of Greek and Turkish is much more important for advancement, i.e. for economic or social benefits” (Manova, 2011:263).
History of the Pomak Language
Pomak is a minority language hailing from the South Slavic branch of the Indo-
European family of languages. Pomak is a local vernacular spoken mainly in the Balkan area and is a combination of linguistic elements hailing from Greek, Bulgarian (Slavo-
Bulgarian) and Turkish (Theoharidis, 1995:21). It is a language spoken by Pomak minorities in Greece, Bulgaria, Turkey and other Balkan countries. Pomaks are considered an ethnic minority of Greco-Thracian decent that dates back to the 5th century B.C. that has undergone large transformations through the course of history
(Theoharidis, 1995:49). Wherever Pomak is spoken, it is only spoken by the Pomaks of that country as Pomak societies are largely insular. As mentioned earlier, Pomak is
“a Slavic dialect very close to Bulgarian except Serbian Pomaks, who speak Serbo-
Croatian” (Turan, 1999:69), that is also considered as an earlier and purer version of modern Bulgarian (Aarbakke, 2012:153). Hugh Poulton defines Pomaks as “Slavic
4 5
Bulgarians who speak Bulgarian as their mother tongue, but whose religion and
customs are Islamic” (1993:111). There seems to be a general conscensous that Pomak
is an Indo-European South East Slavic language directly descended from Old Church
Slavonic. It has as sister languages, Bulgarian, Church Slavonic, and Macedonian. Time
and time again it has been claimed that Pomak is not a language in itself but rather, a
Bulgarian dialect. However, this is discreditted by Bulgarian speakers themselves as
whenever they come into contact with Pomak, they think it is a purer and more ancient
Bulgarian. Hence, it can be said that it is more accurate to claim that modern Bulgarian
can be said to be derived from Pomak rather than vice versa which is often claimed. It
follows therefore, that Pomak is not an offspring of Bulgarian, but rather, at worst, a
sister language to modern Bulgarian, and at best, an ancestor to modern Bulgarian.
Though there still is intelligibility with Bulgarian to a high degree, the fact that it has
undergone much influence from Greek and Turkish constitute it a language in its own
right; a different language from Bulgarian.
Fig. 7. Slavic languages family tree depicting the relations between Pomak and other
Slavic languages of the author’s design.
Baltic West Indo-European Balto-Slavic Slavic East Bulgarian Western South Church Slavonic Old Church Eastern Slavonic Macedonian
*Pomak
Throughout the years, the Pomak language has undergone dramatic changes that
have altered it in some respects beyond recognition. This is particularly true of its lexis.
“Τhe most common linguistic process involved in the lexical modernization of the
dialects spoken by the Pomaks is the extensive borrowing from both Turkish and
5 6
Greek” (Manova, 2011:269). After the islamization of Pomaks by the Ottomans, a great influx of Turkish words entered the Pomak language. The common denominator of religion henceforth between Pomaks and Turks created fertile ground for extensive borrowing of Turkish words. Turkish borrowings influenced all aspects of Pomak, from counting and numbering, to colloquial and ordinary things, to the religious sphere, to science. Were it not for the common denominator of religion, Pomaks would have been reluctant to accept such drastic changes to their language and by extension their life.
Greek is the second most predominant source of borrowings in Pomak after
Turkish. Most Greek origin words present in Pomak happened because of necessity and not so much because of a particular affinity towards Greece and Greek contrary to
Turkey and Turkish. Greek is thought of as a source for science, education, technology and progress. Therefore, most technological innovations, and science related things have a Greek word in Pomak as is the case with many other languages.
The absence of an official writing system or alphabet and generally a written form, is indicative of the agrarian nature of preoccupation of Pomak people and may be an indicator of the insularity of the Pomak people and by extension of their language.
“Pomaks were traditionally semi-sedentary cattle breeders and farmers, living in the
Rhodope Mountains” (Adamou, 2010:164). However, there is a recent tendency in using Anglicised orthography and using the Roman alphabet in an attempt to start written language use that will distinguish it from influences of nearby countries
(Manova, 2011:270).
Pomak Dialects
The Pomak language is rife with dialectal variations despite extremely short distances between villages where Pomak is spoken. This profusion of dialects is a surprising fact as the spatial distance between the villages where Pomak is spoken is
6 7 such that would not account for this profusion. Some other factors must be at play that provide an explanation as to why there are such drastic differences between the dialects in stress, phonology, morphology and to some extent, vocabulary and syntax too.
It can be said that every Pomak village exhibits small to big dialectal differences from other villages and other dialects. The fact that there is no standard and general
Pomak dialect complicates things greatly as there is no basis to compare a dialect with and account for the changes and variations. Dialectal variations present in this present body of work are:
i) Dialect of Pachni
ii) Dialect of Kotili
iii) Dialect of Glafki
iv) Dialect of Thermes
v) Dialect of Medusa
vi) Dialect of Mandena
Proposed Pomak alphabet
The present thesis attempts to produce a Pomak alphabet that would best reflect the Pomak sounds as well as that would facilitate the learning of the language. The main goal behind this is to construct a writing system that is as easy to learn as possible, as conscise as possible and as easy to write as possible (Mela-Athanasopoulou, 2011: 89).
Writing is integral to a language’s preservation as it ensures its survival beyond oral speech. The script proposed is the Roman one with 29 letters each standing for a different Pomak sound. The Roman script is a familiar image to Pomaks as most languages they nowadays come into contact with have adopted it. In particular, given the Treaty of Lausanne between Greece and Turkey which posits that Turkish instruction be offered to all muslim minorities in Greece concurrently with instruction
7 8 in Greek, as well as that Greek instruction be offered to Greek-Turks in Turkey, most
Pomaks are already familiar with the cedilla (,) which is part of the Turkish Roman script variant, beneath Cc and Ss so as to change the quality of the sound to even more frication, as well as the umlaut (..) over Oo and Uu to change the quality of the vowels from back to front. Given that the aforementioned sounds are to a large extent associated with the graphemes from the Turkish variant of the Roman script, some of which coincide with German graphemes (i.e. Üü, Öö), with which Pomaks have become accustomed to, it is practical to include them as there already is an associa tion between those sounds and those graphemes from other languages in the minds of most
Pomaks. An exact number of literacy is unavailable although it can be surmised that due to the agrarian nature of the speakers, older generations are more illiterate than more recent ones. Some have attempted to include digraphs from English (i.e. Sh, Ch, etc.) which nonetheless would be confusing for a people that are to a large extent illiterate, particularly the older the generations. Therefore, for brevity, convenience and practical reasons, graphemes known from other languages associated with sounds are retained. The grapheme Ää is used as a graphemic representation of the near-open front unrounded vowel which is not found in any variant of the Roman script that Pomaks come in contact with.
Additionally, the Greek letters Γγ, Δδ, and Θ,θ one could argue that could be included as there is an ever-increasing influx of Greek loan words. Including those letters in a proposed Pomak alphabet is a valid claim as they appear to no longer undergo processes that transform them to Gg, Dd, and Tt, in the minds of Pomaks, or even if they do, it happens in the Pomak of elderly speakers. They appear all the more retained intact and one could advocate their inclusion in a Pomak alphabet. Perhaps a revision of the present proposed alphabet will be in order in the future when the
8 9 aforementioned letters have become so salient in Pomak that they are no longer treated as exotic sounds.
Table 1. Proposed Pomak alphabet.
Letter Name Phonemic equivalent Example and gloss Aa a ɑ saat ‘hour, clock’ Ää æ æ mæstu ‘place’ Bb be b bardak ‘glass’ Cc je dʒ ikinci ‘second’ Çç tshe tʃ çüzdi ‘strangers’ Dd de d dete ‘child’ Ee e e zeytin ‘(olive) oil’ Ff fe f maf ‘terrible’ Gg ge g glödam ‘I see’ Hh he x or h hizmet ‘service İi i i kilu ‘kilo’ Iı ɯ ɯ havlıye ‘towel’ Jj zhe ʒ jena ‘woman’ Kk ka k kufin ‘basket’ Ll le l likyo ‘senior highschool’ Mm me m mikser ‘mixer’ Nn ne n nevæsta ‘bride’ Oo o o doska ‘plank’ Öö œ œ jölva ‘turle’ Pp pe p pepel ‘ash’ Rr re r rabuta ‘work’ Ss se s slatko ‘sweet’ Şş she ʃ şiye ‘neck’ Tt te t tütün ‘tobacco’ Uu u u præsnu ‘milk’ Üü ü y mijü ‘uncle’ Vv ve v voda ‘water’ Yy ye j jenno ‘one’ Zz ze z zdraf ‘healthy’
9 10
2. THE PROPOSAL, aims and methodology of this thesis Literature Review
Pomak is a minority language that is greatly understudied linguistically. There exists some material that looks at Pomaks from a sociological or ehnological point of view yet the linguistic literature available is limited to some papers by Adamou (2010,
2011, 2012, 2013) focussing on particular linguistic phenomena, and a Master’s thesis by Susan Sandry (2013). Susan Sandry’s work is a bold endeavour albeit limited to a single dialectal variation, that of Pachni or Pashevik as it is known in Pomak and which
Sandry has preferred and included in her thesis title. Nevertheless, she does not provide audio recordings to further support her claims. Having said that, the amount of work carried out is commendable and provides a solid first exposure to Pomak that is thoroughly scientific and scientifically-minded instead of subscribing to a political agenda and trying to prove that as true. Additionally, Sandry focuses on a particular dialect, that of Pachni which coincides with the present thesis’ author’s place of origin and own dialect.
Additionally, Adamou also has conducted fieldwork in Pachni. Her work is mostly on phonological and morphological aspects of the Pachni dialect such as the spatio-temporal anchoring morphemes of {–s},{ -t},{ -n} depending on the addressee, the addressor and the proximity, temporal or spatial, of the predicate or item in question which will be examined in the morphological analysis section. Another paper by her, looks at Pomak and Romani in Western Thrace in terms of borrowing from Turkish and whether the profound borrowings included in both Pomak and Romani constitute codeswitching or fused lect. She arrives at the conclusion that as regards Turkish borrowings, they constitute codeswitching in Pomak whilst fused lect with regard to
Romani.
10
11
There have been attempts at codifying and generating grammars of Pomak
(Papadimitriou, Dimopoulos, Doulopoulos, Karahotza, & Moumin, 1996; Nathanael,
1997; Kokkas, 2004), yet they are somewhat questionable as the choice of dialect that acts as the standard version of Pomak is somewhat arbitrary and lacks objectivity as it claims to be general Pomak when in fact it is only reflecting a single particular dialect and arbitrarily singling it out as a Standard version of Pomak. What is more, there have been attempts at grammar creation funded by nationalist-minded entrepreneurs and businessmen that seek to promote a particular identity or a specific ideology on or regarding Pomaks. Given the oral nature of Pomak and the lack of a written form, those attempts at Pomak grammar and dictionary creation have employed various orthographies and alphabets most of which fail miserably in capturing the verisimilitude of Pomak sounds in written form. The only realistic option then is the international phonetic alphabet (IPA). That said, an orthographical alphabet for writing
Pomak is attempted by the author of the present thesis who is a native speaker of Pomak.
No grammar of Pomak exists in the English language but Adamou, a Greek linguist based in Paris, has published four papers in English and three in French on
Pomak, based on short field trips to the region. The present thesis will refer mostly to the works of Adamou and Sandry.
11
12
Methodology The present thesis aimed to document the Pomak language in the way outlined in Essentials of Language Documentation (Gippert, Himmelmann, Mosel, 2006) and particularly in the steps outlined by Mosel without focusing on a particular register of speech and without direction of the discussions (2006: 67-85). The audio recorded data gathered for the purpose of this thesis were collected through recording of the speakers talking about diverse things ranging from daily life, day-to-day activities, to telling stories from the past, to receipes, to funny stories, to scary stories, to expectations about the future, to social events, to casual discussions.The audio recorded data was collected throughout the period of September 2014 and May 2015. The recordings were done in the village of Pachni and the cities of Xanthi and Thessaloniki. The audio material was recorded using the Motorola Moto G 2013 Android smartphone and the recording software employed was Smart Voice Recorder. The speakers were all adults with ages ranging from 21 to 65. Age, as evident in the recorded data, is a significant factor as the older the speaker, the fewer borrowings from other languages in their speech. The speakers were of different educational backgrounds as well as different villages. This is particularly important as the present thesis will also attempt to highlight some similarities and differences among the different Pomak dialects.
Due to the speakers’ feeling uncomfortable with disclosure of their identities and names, fictitious Pomak names are provided along with the actual age of the speaker in the transcriptions of the recordings. Any name referenced in the recordings is not editted so as to be removed, but for reasons of discretion, it was not provided in the transcription of the recordings. Instead, an initial of the mentioned name is used.
The audio recordings were editted so as to amplify the volume, normalise where necessary, and limit white noise, background noises and any other sound that might
12
13 have interfered with the clarity of the speech produced by the recorded subjects. The software used for audio editting was Adobe Audition CC 2015 and Audacity.
The transcription of the recordings was done through the use of the International
Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) for want of a natural Pomak alphabet as Pomak is an oral language lacking its own distinct alphabet. The Doulos SIL font was used for Pomak so that all phonetic symbols are safely portrayed. The English translation provided aims to stay as much faithful to the meaning as well as to the sentence structure of the original
Pomak sentence.
Expletives, vocatives, colloquialisms, and pleonasms are normally not translated or translated once as they do not carry any meaning but function as words that establish a particular rapport with the fellow speaker or are there as emphatic constructions or even as unconscious repetitions, results of force of habit.
Recording Details
General Data:
Total number of recorded speakers: 14
Total duration of recorded material: 1 hour 14 minutes 26 seconds (1:14:26 hrs)
Number of dialects recorded: 6
Dialects recorded: Pachni, Glafki, Thermes, Mandena, Kotili, Medusa
Recording 1:
Speakers: Bahri (22)1, Sabri (26)
Topic: Casual Conversation – Story from Past – Expectations about the future
1. The number in parentheses indicates the speaker’s age.
13
14
Pomak dialects spoken: Medusa, Pachni
Duration: 5 minutes 47 seconds (05:47 min)
Recording 2:
Speakers: Rahmi (25) & Sabri (26)
Topic: Casual Conversation – Routine – Expectations about the future
Pomak dialect spoken: Pachni
Duration: 11 minutes 32 seconds (11:32 min)
Recording 3:
Speakers: Salih (56) & Sabri (26)
Topic: Receipe for Baking Bread
Pomak dialect(s) spoken: Pachni
Duration: 8 minutes 38 seconds (8:38 min)
Recording 4:
Speakers: Mehmet (22) & Sabri (26)
Topic: Casual conversation – Routine – Plans/Expectations about the future
Pomak dialects spoken: Kotili, Pachni
Duration: 11 minutes 9 seconds (11:09 min)
Recording 5:
Speakers: Suat (22) & Sabri (26)
14
15
Topic: Casual Conversation – Routine – Plans/Expectations about the future
Pomak dialects spoken: Mandena, Pachni
Duration: 11 minutes 5 seconds (11:05 min)
Recording 6:
Speakers: Aishe (51), Fatme (42), Sabri (26), Necmi (57), Erkan (21), Bediha
(65), Fehmi (44), Leyle (39)
Topic: Casual Conversation – Stories from the past – Routine
Pomak dialects spoken: Glafki, Pachni
Duration: 11 minutes 3 seconds (11:03 min)
Recording 7:
Speakers: Mustafa (22) & Erkan (21) & Sabri (26)
Topic: Casual Conversation – Funny Story – Scary Story
Pomak dialects spoken: Thermes, Pachni
Duration: 9 minutes 17 seconds (09:17 min)
Recording 8:
Speakers: Salih (56), Aishe (51) & Sabri (26)
Topic: Social Event
Pomak dialect spoken: Pachni
Duration: 5 minutes 58 seconds (05:58 min)
15
16
Native speaker participants
Bahri (male, 22 years old, university student)
Sabri (male, 26 years old, tertiary/university education)
Rahmi (male, 25 years old, university student)
Salih (male, 56 years old, tertiary/university education)
Mehmet (male, 22 years old, university student)
Suat (male, 22 years old, university student)
Aishe (female, 51 years old, elementary education)
Fatme (female, 42 years old, elementary education)
Necmi (male, 57 years old, tertiary/university education)
Erkan (male, 21 years old, university student)
Bediha (female, 65 years old, elementary education)
Fehmi (male, 44 years old, secondary education)
Leyle (female, 39 years old, elementary education)
Mustafa (male, 23 years old, university student)
*A limitation of the present thesis is the number of male and female speakers and the age of most of the speakers. Most speakers are generally reluctant to be recorded. That is why the male speakers are higher as well as the number of younger people who are more educated and more open-minded to scientific research.
16
17
Research objective
The aim of the present thesis is to present a linguistic analysis of Pomak by focusing on phonology, morphology, lexis, and syntax. The author, by being a native speaker of Pomak and particularly the dialect of Pachni, wishes to analyse Pomak and some of its many dialects as there is scarce work particularly from native Pomak speakers. The present thesis intends to linguistically present the Pomak language based on authentic fieldwork recorded data and highlight some Pomak characteristics with respect to phonology, morphology, lexis, and syntax. The present thesis did not begin with any assumptions regarding Pomak but rather was guided through the data. In addition, differences and similarities between dialects are shown in cases where they are distinct and noteworthy. The fieldwork research audio data is original and a product of authentic speech and the basis of the linguistic analysis carried out on Pomak in the present thesis. It is instrumental in drawing conclusions regarding Pomak. Additionally, given the inconclusive and scarce information on Pomak from non-native speakers, a native speaker’s research account on Pomak as is the case with the present body of work, may shed further light on this minority language. This endeavour has not been an easy task as its objective was ambitious from scratch, trying to fathom the order of the chaos of the many and various dialects, and the inner workings of the language without having a solid ground from previous research.
17
18
3. PHONOLOGY The recorded data employed in the present thesis are transcribed using the
International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) rather than the Pomak alphabet I proposed
earlier. The only scientifically and academically precise way of representing Pomak
given the absence of an established and accepted alphabet is the International Phonetic
Alphabet (IPA), something which the present thesis endeavours despite also proposing
a potential Pomak alphabet.
3.1. The Sounds of Pomak Vowels The Pomak vowel inventory can be considered an amalgamation of the vowel
inventories of the languages that dominated the region and greatly influenced Pomak.
More specifically, Pomak has in common with Greek the vowels ɔ, u, i, e, and ɐ which
is close to the Greek ɑ and is transcribed as such in the data. With Bulgarian the
aforementioned as well as æ, and with Turkish the vowels y, ɯ, ø as well. Given
Pomak’s Slavic nature, it can be said that the natural Pomak vowels are all the above
exception the Turkish additions y, ɯ, ø, which are mostly found in Turkish borrowings.
Fig.8. Vowel chart of Pomak VS Vowel charts of Greek, Bulgarian, & Turkish
Pomak Greek Pomak chart: author’s design.
Greek chart: Arvaniti (2007).
Bulgarian chart: Ternes, & Vladimirova-Buhtz (1999).
Turkish chart: Turkish Zimmer, & Orgun Bulgarian (1999)
18
19
The vowel inventory of Pomak comprises of a range of vowels. Most of the vowels remain the original Slavic ones shared among other Slavic languages
(Cubberley, & Sussex 2006:153) with some exceptions that have entered Pomak through other languages, most notably, Turkish.
Table 2. Pomak vowel inventory with examples from some of the recordings with numbers corresponding to recording and lines. IPA vowel Pomak Gloss /i/ close front unrounded me`tʃit (1,45)2 school `rɑbuti (2,277) works,things kilu (3,8) kilo `deti (4,57) children /y/ close front rounded ty`tyn (1,62) tobacco myse`fire (2,249) guests `bɔrjy (3, 84) quickly `Miʒy (4,190) uncle /ɯ/ close back unrounded kɯrk (1,139) forty A`tinɑlɯje (2,207) Athenian hɑv`lɯje (3,79) towel ɑltɯn`dʒi (4,157) sixth /u/ close back rounded `præsnu (1,36) milk `ɔku (2,220) eye `brɑʃnu (3, 11) flour bu`bɑ (4,214) dad /e/ close-mid front unrounded tʃek`mɑtsi (1,14) lighters `dene (2,42) days zej`tin (3,32) oil `ɑdje (4,175) leave of absence /ø/ close-mid front rounded `ʒølvɑ (1,35) turtle dørt (2,130) four mɑ`jø (3,16) yeast kɑhve`nø (4,90) café /ɔ/ open-mid back rounded ɔjyn`dʒætsi (1,32) toys hɑ`vɔ (2,100) weather `dɔskɑ (3,40) plank gɔ`dinɑ (4,176) year /æ/ near-open front unrounded tʃy`lætsi (1,17) men `mæstu (2,55) place xlæp (3,51) bread `lætu (4,1) summer /ɐ/ open back unrounded `kɑmenje (1,9) rocks hɑs`ker (2,2) military, soldier sɑ`ɑt. (3,70) hour, clock Arkɑ`dɑʃe (4,300) friends 2. The numbers in parentheses wherever they appear indicate recording and line.
19
20
The schwa (ə) sound or the mid back unrounded vowel (ɤ) seems to be replaced by the Turkish similarly sounding close back unrounded vowel (ɯ) for reasons of economy. The Turkish (ɯ) sound appears in multiple Turkish borrowings and it can be infered that it has gradually dominated and replaced the schwa (ə) and/or the Bugarian or Slavic (ɤ). Some dialects such as the Glafki and Kotili dialects predominantly, and to a lesser degree the Mandena dialect, are notorious for very frequent use of the sound
(ɯ) which appears to replace other vowels such as (i) both word medially and finally
(Recording 2,4,5,6). Some older speakers of Pomak regard this as more alligned with older versions of Pomak, in which similar sounds like (ə), (ɤ), and (ɯ) were ubiquitous.
It may be considered a remnant of Old Church Slavonic which had both front and back vowels, as well as (ə), (ɤ), and (ɯ).
Comments on the Vowel System
The Pomak language has changed thoughout the course of history to a great extent and most of the changes that it has experienced have been the direct result of domination, conquest and power shifts in the region. Hence, with the advent of the
Ottoman empire and the subsequent conquest of the Balkan region, the language has undergone serious changes, to a great extent.
Among the elements that got incorporated into Pomak from Turkish, are the relatively exotic vowels of y, ø, ɯ into the vowel inventory of Pomak. Only scarce instances of those sounds appear in Slavic-origin words. Yet, through countless Turkish borrowings entering Pomak, a preponderance of these sounds started to gradually become apparent. The adoption of these relatively exotic sounds is a direct result of a great many vocabulary item borrowings from Turkish for things otherwise irrelevant to the indigenous speakers of the Pomak vernacular.
20
21
In particular, the vowel ø seems to replace the Turkish vowels e, ɑ, i in any
Turkish-origin word (Sandry, 2013:42). In addition, such words are assigned feminine
gender in Pomak as evidenced by the table that follows which also presents instances
where the final vowel ø word has remained unchanged, thus rejecting the Turkish e, ɑ,
i.
Table 3. Turkish-origin words ending in ø in Pomak and some that do not. Turkish examples with y Gloss dyɲ`øsɑ 1,10
Consonants
Bilabial Labiodental Dental Alveolar Postalveolar Retroflex Palatal Velar Uvular Pharyngeal Glottal Plosive p b t d c ɟ k ɡ Nasal m n ɲ ŋ Trill Tap or Flap r Fricative f v θ ð s z ʃ ʒ x ɣ h Affricates tʃ dʒ Lateral fricative Approximant j
21
22
Lateral approximant l ʎ Table 4. Consonant Chart of Pomak
The Pomak inventory of consonantal sounds has changed over time
accomodating and incorporating sounds from more dominant lanuages and cultures as
the Pomak of older generations indicates when compared to the version of younger
generations. Pomak includes all the consonants included in all Slavic languages
(Cubberley, & Sussex, 2006:163). According to some attempts at creating Pomak
grammars, Pomak has consonantal sounds ranging from eighteen (Panagiotidis,
1997:61), to twenty (Theoharidis, 1996:14), to twenty-one (Sandry, 2013:42), to
twenty-two (Papadimitriou et al, 1996:8, Kokkas, 2005:25). Mostly Slavic origin
consonantal sounds can be said to amount to twenty and if sounds from Turkish and
Greek are included, then that number rises to 29. It can be claimed that Pomak now
includes sounds that are not normally present in other Slavic languages. These are
mainly the Greek consonantal sounds ð θ ɣ which are gradually becoming adopted and
ever more frequent in the speech of the younger generations and it is not a far-fetched
thing to claim that they have become part of Pomak. On the other hand, the voiceless
glottal fricative is of Turkish origin and is usually retained in Turkish borrowings.
The frequent use of Greek particularly by the younger generations all the more
points to the fact that those sounds gradually become adopted as there is an influx of
Greek vocabulary items especially technology and science related vocabulary. The
Greek originating sounds ð θ ɣ, due to them not being originally Slavic in nature, were
realized as the closest Slavic phonemes, those of d t g (Sandry, 2013:46). However, the
original Greek phonemes are ubiquitous in most people’s Pomak that it can be taken as
an indication that those particular consonantal phonemes have become internalized in
22
23 the collective Pomak mind, and hence constitute as much part of it as the original Slavic sounds of d t g. That said, there does not seem to exist a retroactive change in elements containing ð θ ɣ that have become d t g in Pomak when the Greek word has been borrowed.
Greek word borrowings that have undergone the shift of ð θ ɣ to d t g do not seem to revert to ð θ ɣ with their becoming more widespread in use in Pomak. Pomak has the voiceless velar fricative x sound naturally in its inventory because of its Slavic origins which is present in most other Slavic languages. Yet, Pomak has also adopted the voiceless velar fricative h from Turkish.
Table 5. Pomak inventory of consonants with examples. (The bold characters indicate plurality). Consonant phonemes Pomak Gloss and allophones (IPA) /p/ pɑr’tʃ-e (5,127) parts, sections `pepel (6,75) ash /b/ bɑr`tʃin-i (5,119) mountains bɑr`dɑk (6,74) glass /t/ Tyr`kije (5,55) Turkey
/d/ `det-i (5,21) children, kids `den-e (6,3) days /c/ `lico (5,23) senior highschool *not attested in recodings /ɟ/ but present in the - language from borrowings /k/ ku`fin-e (6,188) baskets /g/ `glødɑm (5,43) I see /m/ `mitʃko (5,19) small, little `mikser(ɑn) (6,86) (the/that) mixer /n/ `nɔvɔ (5,33) new ne`væstɑ (6,175) bride /ɲ/ Ala`mɑɲe (7,7) Germany /ŋ/ Aɲ`liɑ (6,3) England Ramadan (month of /r/ Rɑmɑ`zɑn (6,77) fasting) /f/ mɑf (7,262) terrible /v/ `vɔdɑ (3,21) water /θ/ `kɑθe (2,250) every /ð/ ðiɑðikɑ`siɑ (3,127) process
23
24
/s/ `slɑtkɔ (6,176) sweet /z/ `zdrɑvɑ (7,66) healthy /ʃ/ `Iʃtɑm (8,60) I want /ʒ/ `ʒɔtskɔ (6,47) female /x/ `xubeve (5,26) well /ɣ/ ɣim`nɑsiɔ (1,50) junior highschool /h/ hiz`met (6,7) service /tʃ/ `tʃyzd-i (6,162) strangers /dʒ/ Ikin`dʒitu (8,73) the second /j/ Jen`nɔ (7,228) one /l/ `licɔ (5,23) seniot highschool /ʎ/ ðu`ʎɑ (2,94) work
3.2. Phonological processes
The plethora of dialects in a such a relatively small region is not easily explainable. This abundance of dialects without having a starting point, a foundation, a linguistic start point of a standardized version of the language to compare it with and attribute the deviations and differences, has probably acted discouragingly to any person that might be interested in studying the language. The present thesis attempts to try and piece together the plausible rules and the exceptions in Pomak regarding some phenomena that function as common denominators amongst all the dialects.
Additionally, this thesis tries to highlight what underlies the various changes and variations and reasons leading to these variations, so as to reach a plausible explanation of the rules governing those changes that occur in Pomak and its numerous dialects.
Vowel Change
Perhaps the single most ubiquitous and frequent phonological change that appears in many Pomak varieties, is vowel change. The not easily explainable great multitude of Pomak dialects abounds with vowel change in many different environments that make it difficult to discern the general rule from the exceptional cases. An attempt to discern the rule for one Pomak dialect is difficult enough given the
24
25 absence of actual scientific and academic work done on Pomak, let alone to try to fathom the rule underlying more than one dialect. Apart from that, Pomak seems to have many vowels as well as clusters of a vowel sequence and a glide that appear to change to a different vowel. For reasons of simplicity the phonetic character present in the transcribed recorded data ɐ is written as ɑ.
Vowel change of ɔ to ɑ stressed /ɔ/ /ɑ/ in C_CC
`vɔrvem (1st-SG-walk) `vɑrvem (1,23) I walk `kɔʃtɑnɑ (DAT. SG. house) `kɑʃtɑnɑ(1,53) the/that house `vɔtre (ADV. inside) `vɑtre (1,67) inside `kɔʃtɑ (NOM.SG. house) `kɑʃtɑ (1,108) house
All the above examples illustrate a change of the vowel ɔ to ɑ in the environment of a preceding consonant, a following cluster of two consonants and when the syllable is stressed as well as when in the penultimate position. Hence, it is due to phonetic motivation that these changes occur. Additionally, the Pomak of Medusa characteristically changes the dipthong cluster ɔj into e when the stress is in the penultimate position and when the dipthong is preceded by a stop and followed by another e. Yet the opposite occurs when the approximant is word initial and followed by an e.
/ɔj/ e in stresssed penultimate syllables `pɔjem `peem (1,2) (1,4) study `Jeʃte `Ɔʃte (1,5) more Many Pomak dialects employ vowel change particularly with the vowels u and
ɔ. The vowel u usually changes into ɑ particularly word initially and most profusely in
25
26 the dialect of Glafki. The dialect of Glafki is known for its broad changes of most vowels to ɑ, especially the vowels u, i, ɯ or ɔ change into ɑ in almost every environment where they appear particularly when in the environment where the vowel is word initially or in the first syllable of the word.
Vowel change of u, ɔ, and ɯ ɑ
ɑbi`nɑse (6,97) < ubi`nisɑ carries ɑbi`xɑde (6,98) < ubi`xɔde goes to and fro bɑn`nɯʃ (6,111) < bɯn`nɯʃ sometimes ɑ`dɔl (6,135) < u`dɔl downstairs pɑfɑr`ni (6,64) < pufɑr`ni threw
The same holds true for the Kotili dialect where almost all nouns that have an –i change it to - ɯ. The Kotili dialect seems to favour this change not only in nouns but also adjectives as seen with the last two examples below. The ɯ sound or similar sounding vowels were part of Old Church Slavonic and are still evident in Bulgarian where many nouns and adjectives end in (ɤ) which is somewhat similar in sound to ɯ.
gɔ`dinɯ (4,32) < gɔ`dini years pɑ`rɯne (4,39) < pɑ`rine money `stɑrɯ (4,79) <`stɑri old (people) `Drugɯne (4,80) <`Drugine young (people) `kɔpelɯ (4,310) <`kɔpeli boys
Consonant Elision
Another phonological charateristic of Pomak is consonant elision in prepositions when the preceding word ends in a consonant or a vowel other than the first vowel of the preposition, and the preposition begins with a consonant.
26
27
…tʃek`mɑkɑt ɑf rɑ`kɑtɑ (1,16) …the lighter in the hand …`vɑtre ɑf ɑstɑ`nenɑ (1,20) …inside the hospital …dɑ se`deme ɑf `kɑʃtɑ, fɑf ɑrkɑ`dɑʃin (1,13-14) …to stay in a house, in a friend …Me`tʃit ɑf Is`ketʃe (1,44) …School in Xanthi
In the above examples where the preposition is the same, fɑf (i.e. in), the initial consonant of the prepostition is deleted due to the phonological rule stating that it elides when the previous word ends in a consonant or a vowel that is not identical with the vowel of the preposition. The examples below further validate this claim as they present cases where the preposition is retained intact and there is no elision of the fist consonant of the preposition.
…Ispɑ`nijɑ fɑf je`din (1,76) …Spain in one …`klɑdɑxɑ mɑ fɑf `rækɑnɑ (1,18) …they put me in the lake
Moreover, in some cases the whole of the preposition except for the final consonant ellides. This constitutes an extension of the phonological rule of consonant ellision which happens for linguistic economy.
Fsre`de (8,91) in (the) center `Fselu (2,268) in (the) village L – vocalization
In environments where there is a lateral l phoneme before an open back unrounded sound irrespective of syllable or stress, the lateral phoneme l changes to that of a voiced approximant, or in this case, a voiced fricative. This phenomenon is typical of the Pomak dialect of Medusa and the other surrounding Pomak villages. The phenomenon of L-vocalization is present in Bulgarian as well (Jobov, 2004) and is probably attributable to the fact that Medusa is closer to Bulgaria than many of the other
27
28
Pomak speaking villages of Greece and hence it has been more influenced than
Bulgarian.
`vɑfem (1,12) < `lɑfem = talk (in detail)
`pikvɑ (1,35) < `pikla = piss/urine
In Bulgarian, l vocalization occurs in consonantal clusters as well as in environments with back vowels different than ɑ. That said, this phenomenon occurs mostly in the
Bulgarian of the youth and the l sound does not vocalize into a voiced fricative but rather, a voiced approximant contrary to Pomak (Jobov, 2004:65-66).
E.g. малко (a little) [mɑlko] Standard Bulgarian Post L-Vocalization: малко (a little) [maʊ̯ ko] or [mao̯ko].
Deaffrication of tʃ to ʃ
Deaffrication of tʃ to ʃ occurs in the dialects of Pachni and Kotili in adjectives such as `mutʃek while at the same time the preceding vowel turns from back rounded to front unrounded. The examples that follow taken from the recordings illustrate this point:
`mitʃekMASC - `mitʃkaFEM - `mitʃkuNEU - `mitʃkiPL
`mutʃekMASC - `mutʃkaFEM - `mutʃkuNEU - `mutʃkiPL
Deaffrication to ʃ + Vowel Fronting of the vowel before an affricate:
`miʃekMASC - ` miʃkaFEM - ` miʃkuNEU - `miʃkiPL
Vowel Fronting and unrounding of the vowel before an affricate:
28
29
`mitʃekMASC - `mitʃkaFEM - `mitʃkuNEU - `mitʃkiPL
Table 6. Occurrences of each variant in the recordings. No change Deaffrication of tʃ to ʃ Fronting and and fronting and unrounding of preceding unrounding of preceding vowel vowel `mutʃek (1,13) (1,15) etc. `miʃkunu (2,141) `mitʃkɔ (5,19) `mutʃka (1,110) `Miʃku (4,275) `Mitʃkɔ (6,55) `mutʃek (7,72) `miʃek (4,273) `mutʃkine (7,206)
The above table shows similarities between the northern villages of Thermes and Medusa which retain the original form unchanged. The central villages of Pachni and Kotili appear to apply deaffrication and vowel fronting and unrounding, whilst the southern villages of Glafki and Mandena seem to retain the affricate albeit applying vowel fronting and unrounding.
Affrication of ʒ to dʒ
Another phonological process that occurs in some dialects of Pomak is the affrication of the fricative ʒ to dʒ word medially and intervocally between two vowels.
This is generally thought to be the case with the Medusa Pomak dialect and less so in other dialects where it is an exception rather than the rule. The following examples taken from the recording of the Medusa dialect speaker illustrate this point:
ni `mɔdʒexɑ (1,29) `modʒe (1,137) < ni `mɔʒem it can These are the only two instances that are found in the Medusa dialect speaker’s recording. All the other cases of dʒ in the recording constitute Turkish borrowings that have been retained unchanged and do not constitute cases of affrication word medially and intervocally between two vowels. Similarly, affrication does not seem to occur 29 30 where the ʒ sound is found in different environments. The following examples point to it being the case: Beʃin`dʒinu (1,3) the fifth ɔjyn`dʒætsi (1,32) toys ʒeɔlɔ`ʒi (1,8) Geology `ʒølvɑ (1,35) turtle This is not the case with the other dialects where in similar environments and in similar verbs, the same does not seem to occur. No affrication of the fricative occurs in the same environment. Pomak Gloss Pomak Gloss `mɔʒiʃ (2,23) (2,91) you can (sg.) `mɔʒim (7,17) (7,180) we can `mɔʒe (2,146) he/she/it can `mɔʒe (5,49) he/she/it can `mɔʒem (4,38) (4,170)I can `mɔʒiʃ (5,104) you can (sg.) `kɑʒem (4,210) I tell `mɔʒɔ (6,48) he/she/it can Final stop devoicing Another phonological process is final stop devoicing in monosyllabic words. According to Cubberley and Sussex, “voiced paired consonants are devoiced in final position (2006:172). It is clear from the data tha when a stop is word finally and especially when the word is monosyllabic, it tends to lose its voicing and becomes the voiceless equivalent of the stop. The b, d, g, sounds lose voicing and turn into p, t, k. The following examples extracted from the recordings illustrate this point: 30 31 (1) `xlæbɑn (3,1) (3,91) (3,131) `xlæp (3,51) (3,98) bread (2) `drugen (2,25) `drugɑnɑ (2,45) druk (2,31) other(MASC/FEM/NEU/PL) `drugi (2,72) (3) ud `ɑnne (3,2-3) from mum BUT ut me`rɑk (3,142) from worry ud ɔn (3,60) from ten BUT ut krɑj (3,29) from start ud ɑjn`vɑ(3,64) (3,98)from that BUT ut vɑr`xu (3,77) from top As seen above, the final obstruent devoices when the word is monosyllabic in the Nominative case and ends in b, d, g, as well as that the voicing of the final stop is retained if and when the following word begins with a vowel (3). Vowel alternation Pomak presents many instances where the core vowel alternates with another vowel in different case forms or number. Sandry claims that “[v]owel alternation occurs regularly in nouns with monosyllabic stems in which the stress shifts from the stem vowel a, o or o when the underived definite is formed” and that “[s]uch nouns also undergo vowel alternation when the diminutive or augmentative is derived” (2013:65). The vowel also alternates either in plural formation or when the noun is used with the definite or deictic morpheme as well. kɑrf (1,39) NOM.SING. <`kɔrvije PL. blood me`sɔtu (1,27) DAT.SING.DEF./A <`møsu NOM.+SING. meat `rɔki (3,27) NOM.+ PL. <`rɔkɑ NOM.+SING. hand BUT rɑ`kɔsɑ DAT.+SING.+DEF. The vowel alternates in definite or deictic constructions most frequently and less so in plural constructions. Deictics, by the sheer fact that they add another syllable to the 31 32 word, render the monosyllabic or disyllabic word a disyllabic or polysyllabic word and hence stress has to be reassigned place and as Pomak assigns stress to the penultimate as a general rule, stress shift occurs which causes vowel alternation. Consonant alternation Another phonological characteristic of Pomak is consonant alternation. Some nouns and adjectives tend to alternate between two vowels particularly in plural constructions and deictic constructions. This is usually the case with the voiceless velar stop k which affricates and becomes ts or f becoming v in the plural or with deictic morphemes. Sandry believes that all masculine singular nouns ending in k alternate this consonant to ts when the plural is formed (2013:68). tʃek`mɑkSING.DEF. (1,16) lighter tʃek`mɑtsi (1,14) lighters tʃy`lækSING.INDEF. man tʃy`lætsiPL.INDEF. (1,17) men pɔrfSING.INDEF. first `pɔrvɔsɔ/pɔrvusuSING.DEF./S. (5,215) the/this first kɑrf (1,39) NOM.SING. blood `kɔrvije PL. blood(Plural) 32 33 Vowel syncope A phonological process that is evident is Pomak is vowel syncope whereby the vowel in the ultimate syllable of the masculine adjective ellides when forming the feminine and neuter genders or plural number. `pɔlɑnMSC.SING. + {-ɑ}pl = `pɔlɑnɑ `pɔlɑnMSC.SING `pɔlnɑFEM.SING. (3,14) or `pɔlnuNTR.SING or `pɔlniPL. Pomak presents vowel syncope in the formation of non-masculine adjective forms from the masculine when “the last stem vowel of the masculine singular is unstressed ɑ or e (Sandry, 2013:70). It syncopises the last vowel of the ultimate sentence of the adjective in the masculine when changing to feminine, neuter, or plural. It is not a case of vowel metathesis as is evident from the neuter form of the adjective as shown above. Other instances of vowel syncope appearing in the data: `tɔpɑlMSC. warm `tɔplɑFEM. (3,21) `mɔkɑrMSC. wet `mɔkrɑFEM. (6,320) Vowel syncopy also occurs in some dialects such as the Kotili dialect and in some respects the Mandena dialect where wh-question words also suffer vowel syncope which sometimes extends and become a whole syllable elision as is the case with the following examples: E.g. `nikɑknɔ/ɑ nothing `niknɔ (4,110) kak`nɔnu/kɑk`nɑnu what / that which `knɔnu (4,287) 33 34 3.3. Word stress Word stress, as with any language, also plays a significant role in Pomak too as it helps in disambiguating similarly sounding words and avoid confusion. Despite there being a great multitude of dialects of Pomak and hence, some changes in word stress will be unavoidable, there seem to be general underlying common denominators among all dialects of Pomak. A general stress rule that seems to be applicable in all or most Pomak dialects, is that the most usual place that the word stress is found is the penultimate syllable. Sandry (2013:61) claims that “in verbs whose stems are of more than one syllable the final syllable is not stressed”. This holds true for all Pomak dialects not only for the dialect of Pachni studied by Sandry. Unlike Bulgarian which has free and mobile stem which can occur on any syllable of the word and move to other syllables of the word either within an inflectional paradigm or in word-formation processes (Cubberley, Sussex, 2006:184), Pomak is not as free nor is the stress bestowed free reign and movement although it allows some stress shift but in general, Pomak tends to retain the stress on the penultimate or on the verb inflectional suffixes in some cases. Table 7. Disyllabic and trisyllabic words with the stress on the penultimate and antepenultimate Verbs Pomak English `vɔrvem (1,6) I walk `mɔgɑm (1,12) I can `iʃtɑm (2,103) I want `værvɑm (2,115) I believe `prɑvem (3,7) I do/make `mɑtʃkɑm (3,48) I massage `vikɑʃe (4,45) you were saying `zbirɑme (4,93) we gather/collect 34 35 `sedem (5,16) I sit/stay sɑ`dime (5,86) we sow `slizɑme (6,130 we descend `pɔdɑm (7,81) I go kullɑn`disvɑ (8,21) he/she/it uses Another stress pattern is the shifting of the stress from the antepenultimate or penultimate to the last syllable ending in i or o or ö. Sandry (2013:61) claims that it applies only in the third person plural present and only in non-past verb stems ending in ɔ or ø. However, this is not a universally applicable phonological rule as other morphophonological processes may not allow for the stress shift. Pomak seems to disallow the stress appearing in suffixes that show gender and plurality such as in participial forms (Sandry, 2013:61). Proper names in Pomak never shift stress irrespective of inflectional or derivational suffix attached to them. They do not suffer stress shift irrespective of case, gender, augmentation or diminution. Stress shifts when the noun is inflected with deictic or diminutive or augmentative morphemes due to vowel alternation. Vowel alternation forces stress shift from initial word stress position to the penultimate syllable which would not have been the case if the vowel had remained the same as diminutive and augmentative and deictic marker morphemes do not normally cause stress shift in the word. E.g. `rɔki (3,27) hands `rɔkɑ hand rɑ`kise these hands rɑ`kɔsɑ this hand `nɔgi legs `nɔgɑ leg nu`gine (1,26) those legs nu`gɔnɑ that leg Additionally, case, gender and plural suffixes are never stressed in adjectives (Sandry, 2013:62). 35 36 `xubɑvu (2,33)NEUT. SING. `xubɑfMSC. SING. good pɑr`livɑ (3,22) FEM. SING. pɑr`lifMSC. SING. hot `ɔvɑlestɑ (3,40)FEM. SING. `ɔvɑlestMSC. SING. oval de`belu (3,78) NEUT. SING. de`belMSC. SING. fat/thick `suxi (8,41) PL. suxMSC. SING. dry Nouns ending in u in the singular number shift their stress from the penultimate to the ultimate syllable in the plural. Yet, in the respective numbers (i.e. singular or plural), when they are followed by definite or deictic suffixes they retain the original place of stress of the noun in that number (i.e. singular or plural). `plɑtnu (3,78) fabric plɑt`nɑ fabrics BUT`plɑtnunuSING.DEIC. the/this fabric plɑt`nɑnɑ the/those fabrics `selu village se`lɑ villages BUT`selunuSING.DEIC. the/this village(8,26) se`lɑnɑ the/those villages As seen above, word stress is mobile in Pomak although it tends to gravitate more to the penultimate syllable and is generally indifferent to suffixes of gender, number, case or deictics. 36 37 4. MORPHOLOGY Words are divided into content words and function words. Content words constitute words that can independently carry meaning whilst function words, despite carrying grammatical meaning, that meaning is realised only when they attach to other content words. Content words constitute a category that is open to innovation and new words whilst function words constitute a relatively closed and fixed category which rarely allows for innovation. “Words … which do not denote objects, ideas, etc are known as function words and they belong to classes known as functional categories” and “are distinguished from nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs and prepositions, which are often called content words” (Radford, Atkinson, Britain, Clahsen, Spencer, 2009:132, Mela-Athanasopoulou, 2006: 6-8). The Pomak language has a very rich morphology with many inflectional and derivational affixes that alter a word’s meaning when combined with it and an attempt to exhaustively record and present them is a feat that requires immense amount of time and work and it is beyond the scope of the present thesis. This thesis has attempted to shed some light on only the most prominent morphological features that predominantly have to do with the major linguistic categories such as nouns, verb and adjectives. Pomak allows for innovation and borrowing from other sources in the creation of new nouns or verbs and other categories. Yet, as is the case with most languages, function words constitute an area where innovation is scarce especially when the language is resistant to influence. Function words constitute a closed group of words and scarcely leave room for new such morphemes, whilst the content words are an open group and accept external influence and innovation. Moreover, “[a] morpheme which can also stand as a word is called a free morpheme” whilst words which “are unable to 37 38 function as free-standing words and these are called bound morphemes” (Radford, Atkinson, Britain, Clahsen, Spencer, 2009:140). Additionally, the morphology of Pomak is very rich in that word formation through affixation and derivation is both allowed and frequent. The recorded data abounds with instances of both inflectional and derivational morphology. In Pomak, verbs inflect for person and number, whilst nouns inflect for number, gender, and case. Adjectives also inflect for number, gender, and case. Pomak derivational morphology is rich in that it constructs new words and attaches meanings through the process of derivation through affixation (prefixation, infixation, and suffixation). 4.1. Nouns Pomak employs derivational morphology to form new words out of old, already existing ones. Augmentation, and diminution are morphemes that denote an affective state towards a person or an object and they are present in Pomak. Such morphemes do not change the class of the word but rather amplify or reduce its semantic content. Augmentation morphemes magnify the item talked about or attribute negative aspects or express negative feelings about the item. On the other hand, diminution, apart from denoting something that is small in size, also reduces the semantic content or shows affection towards the object or person talked about. Augmentative and diminutive morphemes in Pomak establish the subject’s state of mind and attitude towards the object, and are directly correlated and dependent on the subjects’ psychological state of mind. Augmentation and diminution Diminution: Noun stem + diminutive suffix {ink/tʃe/ku} + Gender suffix 38 39 a) `lɑmb-inkɑ (3,69)3 < `lɑmbɑ that little lamp b) tu`lumb-inkɑ (3,76) < tu`lumbɑ little spray c) `lɑmb-inkɑ (7,271) < `lɑmbɑ little lamp d) kɑn`dil-tʃe (7,271) < kɑn`dil little light e) `lɑmb-inkɑ (7,273) < `lɑmbɑ little lamp f) pɑ`ritse (8,18) < pɑ`ri little money g) lɑ`ʒi-tʃkɔ (6,93) < lɑ`ʒitsɑ little spoon h) `glɑdɑn-ki (8,11) <`Glɑdni little hungry ones i) `nɔf-ku (8,22) <`nɔvu little/somewhat new j) pa`ni-tʃki (8,85) < pa`nitsi little containers Augmentation: augmentative suffix {iʃte} a) `lɑmb-iʃte < `lɑmbɑ that big/bad lamp b) tu`lumb- iʃte < tu`lumbɑ big/bad spray c) `lɑmb- iʃte < `lɑmbɑ big/bad lamp d) kɑn`dil- iʃte < kɑn`dil big/bad light e) `lɑmb- iʃte < `lɑmbɑ big/bad lamp f) pɑ`ri- iʃtɑ < pɑ`ri big/bad money g) lɑ`ʒi- iʃtɑ < lɑ`ʒitsɑ big/bad spoon h) *no augmentative4 i) *no augmentative j) pa`ni- iʃtɑ < pa`nitsi big/bad containers The above nouns are in Nominative case in the number they appear in the recordings. Diminutives are instances of showing affection towards someone or something and are usual phenomena in Pomak despite not appearing broadly in the recordings. Augmentation in Pomak is done with the addition of the morpheme -iʃte and it denotes that something is either big in dimensions or that the speaker feels disaffection towards it. Examples of augmentation are not present in the recordings yet the diminutives present are also given by the author in their augmentative to illustrate the difference. Diminution is done by adding the suffix -inkɑ or the alternative suffix –tse in phonological environments where the previous word ends in a vowel, as shown above. The allomorph -tʃe appears in environments where the previous word ends in a consonant as shown in example (4) which is the only instance in the recordings. 3. The numbers in parenthesis point to recordings and lines. 4. Adjectives do not have augmentatives as shown in examples h) and i). 39 40 Derived Nouns Word production in Pomak is a simple process as it mostly involves producing new words from old through the addition, substitution or removal of morphemes. The Pomak language constructs new words out of old ones. Nouns constitute the most important word category along with verbs in Pomak. Pomak has ways in forming new nouns out of other words of different word categories. Among the noun formation derivation processes attested are: a) Deverbal Nouns, and b) Deadjectival nouns. Deverbal nouns The formation of nouns from verb forms also exists in Pomak and is a frequent process for word formation in Pomak. Some instances of deverbal noun formation from the recordings are the suffix {-je} which denotes the state or the action stated in the verb whilst suffixes such as {-tina} denote a noun form meaning something bad or gross. Pomak includes many morphemes which alter the meaning of the noun to mean many things. The following examples constitute but an instance of what such provisions exist in Pomak. Table 8. Deverbal Pomak nouns in the recordings. Pomak Gloss Verb Noun Verb Noun `ʒivɑm 1st.SG.PR. `ʒivɑnje (2,136) live living `mesem 1st.SG.PR. `mesenje (3,108) bake baking sɑ`dem 1st.SG.PR. sɑ`denje (5,88) sow sowing bɑr`kɑm/bɔrkɑm bɑrkɑ`tinɑ (6,133) mix (bad/gross) 1st.SG.PR. mixture Deadjectival nouns Most deadjectival nouns in Pomak are usually of Turkish origin and hence follow the Turkish noun formation rules in that particular case. Deadjectival nouns are 40 41 formed with the addition of {- lɯk} when the word is of Turkish descent or {-je} when the adjective is Slavic as in the case of –je which denotes a state. Generally, deadjectival nouns is not a frequent phenomenon in Pomak. The following two examples are not from the recorded data: *`Zdrɑf-vɑ-u-i (MASC.-FEM.-NEU.-PL.) Healthy Zdrɑv-je || Health *gulæm-ɑ-u-i (MASC.-FEM.-NEU.-PL.) Big gulæmen-je || self-aggrandisement *=Not included in data but provided by author. Only one deadjectival noun is present in the recorded data which in intself is indicative of the scarce occurrence of noun formation from adjectives in Pomak. Table 9. Deadjectival Pomak noun in the recordings. Pomak Gloss Adjective Noun Adjective Noun sɯdʒɑk Other, similar examples of deadjectival nouns in Pomak through Turkish are: *hɑ`zɯr<ΤRhazır hɑzɯr-`lɯk ready readiness/ a pack *tʃɑlɯʃ`kɑn<ΤRçalışkan tʃɑlɯʃkɑn-`lɯk studious studiousness *=Not included in data but provided by author. Pomak is a language that assigns gender to nouns and adjectives. There are three distinct genders in the singular each with different endings that are indicative of the gender. The gender of a noun or adjective is indicated by its inflectional suffix. Additionally, Pomak also assigns number to most nouns with few exceptions not presenting a change when in plural and the reason usually being that they are either mass nouns or borrowings. What is more, most Pomak nouns inflect for definiteness or indefiniteness that functions as a deictic of spatial and temporal proximity or absence 41 42 thereof from the speaker or the addressee. Finally, Pomak nouns also inflect for case with four observed cases, those of the Nominative, the Oblique, the Dative, and the Vocative Case (Sandry, 2013:116) whilst Adamou (2011:3) does not think there is an Oblique but rather an Accusative case which is also “subject to differential marking related to humanness for a number of masculine nouns and, remarkably for Slavic, for some feminine ones as well” (2011:3). The Genitive Case is missing as is the case with Bulgarian and it is either constructed with adjectives or substituted by the Dative. Inflectional Noun Morphemes Pomak is a language that marks nouns for gender, number and case. Nouns decline for four cases per number and each case conveys different information. The cases in Pomak are the Nominative, Dative, Oblique and Vocative. Adamou believes that there is an Accusative case instead of an Oblique case (2011:3). At some point in the past Pomak used to have a Genitive case but it has since become extinct and its meaning is now conveyed through Dative constructions or denominal adjectives. Masculine The unmarked masculine gender noun ends in a consonant and its plural is constructed by adding the plural marker morpheme –je or its allomorph –ve which appears in environments regulated by phonological rules that cause the change or when the noun is monosyllabic. An alternative plural marker morpheme is –i which usually causes consonant alternation to the vowel preceding it. E.g. tʃek`mɑk(ɑt)SING.DEF. (1,16) lighter tʃek`mɑtsi (1,14) tʃy`lækSING.INDEF. man tʃy`lætsi (1,17) 42 43 Table 10. Declension of Pomak masculine nouns. SINGULAR NOMINATIVE `kɑmen-Ø (1,9) i`lætʃ- Ø (1,68) rock medicine DATIVE `kɑmen-u/umu i`lætʃ -y/ymu to/for the rock to/for the medicine OBLIQUE `kɑmen-ɑn i`lætʃ -en the rock the medicine VOCATIVE `kɑmen-Ø i`lætʃ -Ø rock! medicine ! PLURAL NOMINATIVE `kɑmen-je (1,9) i`lætʃ -ve (1,9) rocks medicines DATIVE `kɑmen-jem/`kɑmen- i`lætʃ-vem/ i`lætʃ -venem jenem to/for the rocks to/for the medicines OBLIQUE `kɑmen-jene i`lætʃ -vene the rocks the medicines VOCATIVE `kɑmenje-Ø i`lætʃve -Ø rocks! medicines! Feminine Unmarked feminine gender morphemes are: -ɑ or -kɑ and –i or –ki when the feminine noun is formed out of the unmarked form for the noun which is most often the masculine gender. Additionally, when the feminine noun ends in –e or -ɑ, the plural number is formed with the suffix –i which causes the elision of the –e or –a vowel. E.g. ɑrkɑ`dɑʃ-ØMASC.-Ø SING. ɑrkɑ`dɑʃ-k-ɑ female friend ɑrkɑ`dɑʃ-k-i.(1,98) friend.FEM.SG friend.FEM.PL. 43 44 Table 11. Declension of a Pomak feminine noun. SINGULAR NOMINATIVE `mɔmɑ-Ø (4,257) ɑrkɑ`dɑʃkɑ-Ø (1,98) girl girl friend DATIVE `mɔm-une/xi ɑrkɑ`dɑʃk- une/xi to/for the girl to/for the girl friend OBLIQUE `mɔmɑ-nɑ ɑrkɑ`dɑʃk- nɑ the girl the girl friend VOCATIVE `mɔmɑ-Ø ɑrkɑ`dɑʃkɑ-Ø girl! girl friend! PLURAL NOMINATIVE `mɔm-i ɑrkɑ`dɑʃk-i girls girl friends DATIVE `mɔm-im/`mɔm- ɑrkɑ`dɑʃk -im/ ɑrkɑ`dɑʃk -inem inem to/for the girls to/for the girl friends OBLIQUE `mɔm-ine ɑrkɑ`dɑʃk –ine the girls the girl friends VOCATIVE `mɔmi-Ø ɑrkɑ`dɑʃki- Ø girls! girl friends! Neuter Neuter nouns prototypically end in a vowel –e, or –a and form their plural with the addition of the suffix –i to the stem or the less frequent –tsa or -tʃjæ which cause stress shift to the ultimate syllable. Additionally, disyllabic neuter nouns where the vowel is different in each syllable, construct their plural with the addition of another plural suffix –ka. Table 12. Declension of a Pomak neuter noun. SINGULAR NOMINATIVE `dete-Ø (6,46) child DATIVE `dete-nu/mu to/for the child OBLIQUE `dete-nu the child VOCATIVE `dete-Ø child 44 45 PLURAL NOMINATIVE `det-i/`tsɑ/`tʃjæ (1,9) children DATIVE `det-im/`tsɑm/`tʃjæm `det-inem/`tsɑnem/`tʃjænem to/for the children OBLIQUE `det-ine/`tsɑnɑ/`tʃjænɑ the children VOCATIVE `deti/-`tsɑ/-`tʃjæ-Ø children Plurality Plurality in all instances of Pomak is done through suffixation. Pomak is a language that divides nouns and assigns gender. There are three distinct genders in the singular each with different suffixes that are indicative of the gender. The gender of a noun can be indicated by its suffix. Pomak constructs plurality with an addition of a suffix that is usually phonologically conditioned or by the gender of the noun. The prototypical masculine plural suffix is –je and its allomorph –ve when the noun is monosyllabic or polysyllabic and stressed in the penultimate. When the noun is polysyllabic and stressed in the ultimate syllable, the plural suffix –i is employed with the necessary changes taking place such as palatalization of -k –ts when word final. The following examples illustrate this point: a) `kɑmen- je (1,9) <`kɑmen rock b) tʃek`mɑts- i (1,14) The rules that seem to be active in the above examples are: {-je} and allomorph {-ve} /N stressed on the penultimate: e.g. a), f) {-i} /N stressed on ultimate: e.g. b), c), d), e) 45 46 Some masculine words that denote mass nouns do not have plural forms and usually undergo vowel change (Mela-Athanasopoulou, 2006: 20) such as: me`sɔtu (1,27) <`møsu meat `ɣipsɔtu (1,26) Feminine gender nouns usually ending in ø in the singular are usually of Turkish descent and construct their plural with the addition of the suffix –e and the elision of the final vowel –ø (Sandry, 2013: 41). Additionally, some words of Turkish origin assume the suffix –ka which renders them feminine in Pomak. Yet, Pomak is a naturally differentiating language into genders. Therefore, when there is a need to refer to a friend that is of the feminine sex, Pomak employs suffixes that denote feminine gender and usually alter the base form which usually is derived from the masculine or neuter. Consider the following examples: Pomak: ɑrkɑ`dɑʃ-Ø.MASC-Ø.SG ɑrkɑ`dɑʃ-Ø.MASC-{e}.PL.(1,97) friend friend ɑrkɑ`dɑʃ-{k}-{ɑ}.FEM.SG. ɑrkɑ`dɑʃ-{k}-{i}.FEM.PL. (1,98) friend friend Pomak plurality marker morphemes can be {–i}, when the singular noun ends in ɑ or ɔ, in {–e} when the singular noun ends in -ø, in {–ve} or its allomorph {–je } when the singular noun ends in a consonant except for laterals and rhotics. Additionally, suffixes that no longer constitute the unmarked plurality morpheme but are still used concurrently with the unmarked morphemes in some Pomak dialects, are {-tsɑ} or {– tʃjæ}. Additionally, there exists the plural morpheme {–ta} which usually combines with neuter gender nouns. 46 47 Table 13. Pomak nouns in Plural. Singular Plural Gloss Documented data `rɔk-{ɑ} `rɔk-{i} hand/s rɑ`kɑ.SG.-tɑ.DET. (1,16) - pɑn`tɔle trousers pɑn`tɔle.PL-te.DET. (1,18) se`n -{e or ø} se`n-{e} year/s se`nePL. (1,5) (h)ɑstɑ`n-{ø} (h)ɑstɑ`n-{e} hospital/s ɑstɑ`ne-SG.-nɑ.DET. (1,20) ɑmeli`jæt-{Ø} ɑmeli`jæt-{ve} surgery/ies ɑmeli`jæt-SG. (1,21) hɑf`t-{o or ɑ} hɑf`t-{i} week/s hɑf`tɑ-SG. (1,25) `nɔg-{ɑ} `nɔg-{i} leg/s nu`g-i.PL.-ne.DET. (1,26) i`lætʃ-{Ø} i`lætʃ-{ve} medicine/s i`lætʃ-ve.PL.-ne.DET. (1,68) pɑ`r-{ɔ} (rare) pɑ`r-{i} money pɑ`r-i.PL. (1,77) ders-{Ø} ders-{ve}or -{e} lesson `ders-e.PL.-ne.DET. (1,84) `rɑbut-{ɑ} `rɑbut-{i} work `rɑbut-i.PL. (1,132) `det-{e} `det-{e}/{`tsɑ}/{tʃ`jæ} children det-`tsɑ.PL. (1,141) bɑh`tʃ-{ø} bɑh`tʃ-{e} garden bɑh`tʃ-e.PL.-ne.DET. (1,142) 4.2. Adjectives & Adverbs In Pomak adjectives function the same way as with most languages. Their role is to describe the noun by giving further qualitative information regarding it. Below is a list of some adjectives found in the recordings followed by the noun they give further information for. The examples with a double asterisk preceding them indicate non- agreement of the adjective’s gender with the noun they refer to which is evident in the Pomak of younger speakers. Table 14. Pomak adjectives in the recordings. Pomak Gloss `Mlɔzi (2,35) hɑskere many soldiers `tsælɑ (2,121) `rɑbutɑ full/complete work **`kɑmɑtnuNEU (2,218) Sele`nikFEM beautiful Thessaloniki ptʃe`nitʃenu (3,8) `brɑʃnu (from) wheat flour `rɔʒænu (3,11) `brɑʃnu (from) rye flour `pɔlnɑ (3,14) lɑ`ʒitsɑ full spoon `tɔplɑ (3,21) `vɔdɑ warm water pɑr`livɑ (3,22) `vɔdɑ hot water stud`enɑ (3,22) `vɔdɑ cold water 47 48 jen`nɔ (3,22) kɑ`nɑta one jug `ɔvɑlestɑ (3,40) `dɔskɑ oval-shaped plank de`belu (3,78) `plɑtnu fat/thick towel `møkɑ (3,90) ku`rɔnɑ soft (the) crust `Memnun (3,102) sɑm I am content/satisfied plɑ`tenu (4,8) `sitʃku paid everything bæl (3,133) renk white colour tʃer`ven (3,132) renk red colour ze`lenɔ (5,116) Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ green Mandena `gɔrni (5,119) mes`tɑ upper/mountainous regions `murgɔ (6,132) bɑrkɑ`tinɑ dark mixture **`nɔvuNEU. (7,255) mezɑr`lɯkMSC new graveyard Denominal Adjectives Additionally, Pomak forms adjectives out of nouns in what are known as denominal adjectives. They are usually formed with the suffixes –vu/a/u/i and -ʃtu/a/u/i and agree for number and person with the noun. There is also the suffix –li which is most often attached to nouns borrowed from Turkish and as a denominal adjective construction is Turkish in origin itself as the produced denominal adjective is in most cases also exactly the same denominal adjective in Turkish. Table 15. Denominal Pomak adjectives in the recordings. Noun Gloss Adjective Gloss tehli`kø danger tehlike`li (2,222) dangerous Alɑ`mɑɲe Germany Alɑ`mɑntski German (2,125) `selu village `Seleʃti (7,221) (peasant) `dripa fabric/cloth `dripvu (8,109) (made of cloth) je`mek food) je`mekvu (8,60 edible It should be noted here that Pomak has lost the Posessive Case in general except for Proper Names, and its role is filled either with Oblique case constructions or with denominal adjectives. 48 49 Adverbs An adverb is a word that modifies another part of speech such as a verb, an adjective, another adverb. They are usually used to convey extra information with respect to manner, place, time, frequency, degree, level of certainty, etc. Pomak has such adverbs and they are usually identified by their endings in –y, -e, -a and the fact that almost always they are disyllabic or monosyllabic. Additionally, the above adverbial suffixes usually attach to adjectives to form the adverb unless the adverb is suppleted. Pomak does not appear to exhibit comparative or superlative formation through suppletive roots. The Comparative and Superlative forms are constructed periphrastically with the adverb pɔ (more) for the Comparative form and the adverb nɑj/nɯj (most) for the Superlative form. Table 16. Pomak adverbs in the recordings. Pomak Gloss be`læ (2,37) difficult/hard `mlɔgu (2,36) much `xubeve (2,47) well de`letʃe (2,8) far `blize (2,102) close `jættse (2,117) a lot `burʒy (2,139) quickly `mufkɑ (2,146) a little `rættʃiʃ (3,5) rarely/scarcely `mɑlku (3,36) a little `pɔrve (4,3) earlier `Dʒæbɑ (4,11) in vain Comparative and superlative adverb constructions with the examples from the table above would look like Table 17: 49 50 Table 17. Comparative and Superlative particles in context. Comparative pɔ be`læ harder pɔ `mlɔgu more pɔ `xubeve better Superlative nɑj be`læ hardest nɑj `mlɔgu most nɑj `xubeve best Determiners The Pomak language includes suffixes that function as determiners when added to nouns or adjectives. They denote spatial or temporal proximity to the speaker (-s) or the hearer (-t) or spatial or temporal distance from both (-n). According to Adamou, they are “used for spatio-pragmatic and temporal-modal reference in nominal” and that they are “used among others in noun modifiers such as definite articles and demonstratives” and they also “have two sets of uses” (2011:1). “The proximal is used for the present, the middle for the immediate prospective, the distal for the distal prospective” (Adamou, 2011:23). Adamou provides the following examples: a.´kote-so cat-DEF.S 'The cat (close to the speaker, here and now).' b. ´kote-to cat- DEF.A/PAST 'The cat (close to the addressee or realis past).' c. ´kote-no cat-DEF.D/FUT/IRR/HAB 'The cat (distal, realis future, irrealis or habitual).' (Adamou, 2011:2). 50 51 Deictic morphemes attached to nouns and adjectives are omnipresent in the recordings too. Some instances of deictics from the recodings include: `Pɑnn-ɑ ud bɑ`rɑngɑ … dve 3rdSG.Past, pɑdɑm PREP.from MASC.SG.NOM.high-place… two He-fell from high-place two met`rɑ ɑs glɑ`vɑsɑ nɑ`dɔl (7,74-75). MASC.PL.NOM,metre PREP.with FEM.SG.DEF.S PREP.down. metres with the/this-head down “I fell down from a high place…two metres with my head”. In the above example the noun glɑ`vɑsɑ has the determiner sɑ attached to it and denotes something proximal to the speaker both spatially and temporally which in this case also functions as a posessive pronoun. The same word with the deictic morpheme of tɑ would mean something proximal to the addressee or it might be a reference to something that happened to either the speaker or the addressee in the past, i.e. realis past. The alternative deictic nɑ is used to denote something that is distal from both interlocutors, or that is possible in the future, that is altogether unreal or habitual. Something similat appears in the Kalasha language with the difference being that in Kalasha they have to do with spatial proximity (Mela-Athanasopoulou, 2014:66) whilst in Pomak they may be used for temporal proximity or distance from the speaker, the addressee, both or none. -sa close to speaker(s) in time and space -ta close to addressee(s) in space OR close to speaker(s) in time -na distant from both/all in space and time OR close to addressee(s) in time 51 52 These deictics agree for gender and number with masculine nouns taking the morphemes –ɑs, -ɑt- ɑn or –es, -et, -en, the corresponding feminine noun morphemes –sɑ, -tɑ, -nɑ, and the neuter noun morphemes –su, -tu, -nu. Plural morphemes irrespective of singular noun gender the morphemes are –se/-sɑ, -te/-tɑ, -ne/nɑ depending on the final vowel of the noun. Table 18. Determiner suffixes. Masculine Feminine Neuter Plural any gender –ɑs –sɑ –su –se/-sɑ –es -ɑt –tɑ –tu -te/-tɑ -et -ɑn –nɑ –nu -ne/nɑ -en Other instances with the deictics that appear in the recordings are : Nɑ sre`de `selu-nu. (8,26) PREP.In ADV.central MASC.SG.DEF.D./HABITUAL.village “In the center of the village”. In this example, despite both interlocutors speak the same Pomak dialect (i.e. of the Pachni village) and hence the use of the –su being the morpheme that would be expected when referring to the common village since it denotes something that is proximal to the speaker and/or addressee, we notice that instead –nu is employed. This is because in narration about habitual things, that particular morpheme is employed irrespective of proximity of one or both of the interlocutors to the object talked about. ʃe `idɑ(m) nɑx Pɔlɔ`niɑ `kɑktu Will 1stSG.FUT,`vɔrvem PREP.to FEM.SG.Poland ADV.DEF.S/REALIS PAST.as 52 53 Will I-go to Poland as `rekɑx `pɔrve. (4,3) 1stSG.PAST,`vikɑm ADV.before. I-said before. “I will go to Poland as I said before.” In the above example, despite the use of –ta by the speaker, the object spoken about is not proximal to the addressee in space but rather it is realis past as further supported by the pastness of the verb and the adverb `pɔrve (i.e. before). Such deictics are omnipresent and ubiquitous in Pomak nouns. Reality, both temporal and spatial, is perceived by having as point of reference the speaker or the addressee. Furthermore, they situate an item in space-time by assigning to it “coordinates” depending on the speaker’s or the addressee’s position. Culioli’s “situational anchoring framework” (1971) precisely summarises the functions of such deictics: to “anchor” a situation or experience into reality (in Adamou, 2011:2). 4.3. Verbs The formation of verbs from nouns or adjectives is a frequent process of Pomak as there may not be a pre-existent verb that covers the function of the items or states designated by the nouns or adjectives. The needs of Pomak speakers to describe the action performed through the use of those items or states gives rise to: i) Denominal verbs and ii) Deadjectival verbs. 53 54 Denominal verbs Denominal verbs are usually formed with the simple addition of an inflectional suffix marking for person and number and aspect on the noun. In some cases, as is the case with the first example of the table that follows, there may be a prefix denoting the finality or the spontaneity of the action as indicated in the following example where na- indicates the spontaneity of the action. brɑʃ`n-(iv)-vɑm VS nɑbrɑʃ`nivvɑm flour-1st.SG.habitual flour-1st.SG.spontaneous I put flour I flour Table 19. Denominal Pomak verbs in the recordings. Pomak Gloss Pomak Gloss Noun Noun Verb Verb `brɑʃnu flour (nɑ)brɑʃ`nivvɑ flour m (3,130) `ʒenɑ woman `ʒenem - (get) (sɔ) `ʒɔnet wed/marry (5,109) `rɑbutɑ work `rɑbutem - work `rɑbutæxɑ (1,63) Deadjectival verbs Deadjectival verbs are usually formed with the prefixes –na and –ras preceding the noun with the verbal suffix agreeing for person and number with the subject. The above- mentioned prefixes denote finality and completion of the action (i.e. na-) or an increase in quantity or quality (i.e. ras-). 54 55 Table 20. Denominal Pomak verbs in the recordings. Pomak Pomak Adjective Gloss Verb Gloss `pɔlɑn-nɑ-nu-ni full nɑ`pɔlnyvɑm/ (to) make full MASC.FEM.NEU.PL (nɑ)`pɔlnem nɑ`pɔlni (2,285) ʃi`rɔku-ɑ-u-i wide rɑsʃiru`tʃɑevɑm (to) widen MASC.FEM.NEU.PL rɑsʃiru`tʃɑevɑ (3,117) Finite Verb Forms: Tense and Aspect The Pomak language is a language with rich inflectional morphology. Pomak verbs inflect for tense and aspect as well as for person and number. The fact that Pomak has a rich verb inflectional inventory means that the overt inclusion of the subject is redundant and hence, most of the time the subject is not overtly stated, and does not appear in the sentence as it is easily inferrable by the inflectional suffix of the verb. Only for disambiguation and emphatic purposes is the subject of the verb overtly stated. The sole exception is the affirmative of the copula ‘sɑm’ which is also an auxiliary, where the copula cannot stand on its own or when the direct predicate follows it. Therefore, Pomak does not allow a construction like this despite the subject being easily inferrable by the inflectional suffix of the copula: (a) grammatical (b) ungrammatical Jæ sɑm `xubaf. Sɑm `xubaf. PN.1st. 1st-SG.PRES, sam goodMSC. 1st-SG.PRES, sam goodMSC. I am good. (I) am good. Despite the above not being allowed in all dialects of Pomak, when the predicate is topicalised, the verb can stand on its own without an overt subject. 55 56 E.g. `Xubaf sɑm (jæ). goodMSC 1st-SG.PRES, sam (PN. 1stSG). Good (I) am. Conjugation of the verb sɑm in the Present and Past Pronoun Present Past Jæ sɑm bex Ti si be Toj/Tæ/to je be`ʃe Ne si`me bex`me Ve si`te bex`te Te sa be`xa The Tenses: Tense formation and Tense Usage The Pomak language conjugates verbs for person and number as well as tense and aspect. There appear to be 11 tenses most of which correspond to English equivalents. Pomak appears to be lacking the English Present Continuous equivalent while the rest appear to exist and overlap in their temporal coverage of events as they are used in the same way as the English equivalents. The Imperfective (Progressive) & Perfective Aspects In Pomak the progressive (imperfective) aspect occurs only in the past and the future but not in the present. Therefore there is no Present Continuous. Perfective tenses in Pomak are formed with the auxiliary sɑm ‘to be” in the present (i.e. sɑm) or past (i.e. bex) followed by a participle form of the verb which agrees for gender and number. 56 57 Present Simple Table 21. Affirmative of indicative Present Simple of`grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do” VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ `grɑd-em `prɑv-em Ti ‘You’ grɑd-`iʃ `prɑv-iʃ Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ grɑd-`i `prɑv-i Ne ‘We’ grɑd-`ime `prɑv-ime Ve ‘You’ grɑd-`ite `prɑv-ite Te ‘They’ grɑd-`øt `prɑv-et The Present Simple tense is used both for habitual actions at present time as well as a Present Continuous (progressive) without being marked for the progressive aspect. Temporary or momentous action is indicated by a temporal expression denoting the direct present (i.e. ɑj`sæ (now)etc.). The subject can be omitted altogether as it can be inferred from the inflectional suffix. This holds true for Negative, Question as well as Negative Question. Negation is formed through the addition of the negator ni before the verb. E.g. Jæ ni `grɑd-em /`prɑvem. 1stPR. NEG. 1stSG.PRES. `prɑvem. Question is formed through the addition of the question particle li always after the verb. E.g. (Jæ) `Grɑd-em /`Prɑvem li ? (1stPR). 1stSG.PRES. `prɑvem. Q.PART. Negative question is similarly formed through the addition of the negator ni before the verb, and the question particle li right after the verb and functions as a question tag used for confirmation. The Negative Question functions as a question tag used for confirmation in all tenses. E.g. (Jæ) Ni `grɑd-em/ `prɑvem li ? (1stPR). NEG .1stSG.PRES. `prɑvem. Q.PART. 57 58 Past Continuous or Imperfect Past The Past Continuous tense follows exactly the same paradigm outlined above in the Present Simple tense for both Affirmative, Negative, Question and Negative Question cases. Past Continuous inflections are used and the verb root stays unchanged. The morpheme showing progressive aspect in all past tenses is {-ex/ix} which agrees for person and number and changes accordingly as shown below. Table 22. Affirmative of indicative Past Continuous - Imperfect of`grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ grɑd-`ex `prɑv-ex Ti ‘You’ grɑd-`eʃe `prɑv-eʃe Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ grɑd-`eʃe `prɑv-eʃe Ne ‘We’ grɑd-`exme `prɑv-exme Ve ‘You’ grɑd-`exte `prɑv-exte Te ‘They’ grɑd-`exɑ `prɑv-exɑ Past Simple or Factual Past (Aorist) The Simple Past in Pomak is formed with the Simple Past inflections in regular verbs. Additionally a prefix morpheme u or ɔ is employed before the verb root. The Simple Past in Pomak in some irregular verbs is constructed with suppletion through another verb root or stem as shown above. The verb root prɑv- is for habituality whilst another suppletive form, stɔr- is used for non-continuous or non-habitual actions. Some verbs construct the non-continuous, non-habitual form with the prefix na- or is-/iz followed by the base root of the verb and not a suppletive root. 58 59 Table 23. Affirmative of indicative Past Simple – Factual Past (Aorist) tense of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ u-grɑd-`ix `stɔr-ix Ti ‘You’ u-grɑd-`i `stɔr-i Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ u-grɑd-`i `stɔr-i Ne ‘We’ u-grɑd-`ixme `stɔr-ixme Ve ‘You’ u-grɑd-`ixte `stɔr-ixte Te ‘They’ u-grɑd-`ixɑ `stɔr-ixɑ Negation, Question, and Negative Question follow the same pattern as with Simple Present. Future Continuous The Future Continuous for a an action that will have a duration in the future is constructed periphrastically with the future marker ʃe which also appears as the allomorphs se/sa in some Pomak dialects, followed by the Present Simple form of the verb. Table 24. Affirmative of indicative Future Continuous of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ ʃe `grɑd-em ʃe `prɑv-em Ti ‘You’ ʃe grɑd-`iʃ ʃe `prɑv-iʃ Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ ʃe grɑd-`i ʃe `prɑv-i Ne ‘We’ ʃe grɑd-`ime ʃe `prɑv-ime Ve ‘You’ ʃe grɑd-`ite ʃe `prɑv-ite Te ‘They’ ʃe grɑd-`øt ʃe `prɑv-et Negation is constructed with the auxiliary verb `imɑm (i.e. ‘have’) in the negative in the third person singular, i.e. nemɑ, followed by the particle da and the verb. The verb conjugates exactly as the Present Simple indicative: 59 60 E.g. (Jæ) `nemɑ dɑ `grɑd-em /`prɑv-em. The question is formed as is the affirmative with the addition of the question particle li always at the end of the sentence: E.g. (Jæ) ʃe `grɑd-em /`prɑv-em li? The Negative Question is formed as is the negative with the addition of the question particle li either at the end of the sentence or right after the auxiliary nemɑ. E.g. (Jæ) `nemɑ dɑ `grɑd-em /`prɑv-em li? Future Simple The Future Simple tense follows the same structure of the Future Continuous with the sole exception being that in irregular verbs a suppletive root of the verb is used or morphemes that denote the completion of the action followed by the original stem of the verb, exactly as is the case with the Simple Past whilst with the regular verb grɑdem the prefix ɔ or u is employed which denotes the non-continuity of the action. Table 25. Affirmative of indicative Future Simple of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ ʃe `ɔ-grɑd-em ʃe `stɔr-em Ti ‘You’ ʃe ɔ-grɑd-`iʃ ʃe `stɔr -iʃ Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ ʃe ɔ-grɑd-`i ʃe `stɔr -i Ne ‘We’ ʃe ɔ-grɑd-`ime ʃe `stɔr -ime Ve ‘You’ ʃe ɔ-grɑd-`ite ʃe `stɔr -ite Te ‘They’ ʃe ɔ-grɑd-`øt ʃe `stɔr -et 60 61 Future Perfect Continuous The Future Perfect Continuous Pomak equivalent is constructed with the future marker ʃe followed by the conjugated sɑm auxiliary in the present, and then followed by the participle form of the verb. In the case of regular verb stems, the prefix is omitted as it denotes non-continuity. Table 26. Affirmative of indicative Future Perfect Continuous of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ ʃe sɑm grɑd-`il-a-u ʃe sɑm `prɑvil-a-u Ti ‘You’ ʃe si grɑd-`il-a-u ʃe si `prɑvil-a-u Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ ʃe je grɑd-`il-a-u ʃe je `prɑvil-a-u Ne ‘We’ ʃe si`me grɑd-`il-i ʃe si`me `prɑvil-i Ve ‘You’ ʃe si`te grɑd-`il-i ʃe si`te `prɑvil-i Te ‘They’ ʃe sɑ grɑd-`il-i ʃe sɑ `prɑvil-i Negation follows the Future Continuous form where the word nemɑ replaces ʃe followed by da and the auxiliary agreeing for number and person and then followed by the participle form of the main verb. E.g. (Jæ) `nemɑ dɑ sɑm grɑd-`il-a-u /`prɑv-il-a-u. E.g. (Ti) `nemɑ dɑ si grɑd-`il-a-u /`xɔd-il-a-u. Question is formed as is the affirmative with the addition of the question marker morpheme li at the end of the sentence. E.g. (Jæ) ʃe sɑm grɑd-`il-a-u /`prɑv-il-a-u li? E.g. (Tɔ) ʃe je spɑ -l-a-u li? Will it have been sleeping ? 61 62 Negative question is formed as is the negative form with the question particle morpheme li at the end of the sentence. Future Perfect Simple The Pomak Future Perfect Simple follows the pattern set out by Future Perfect Continuous with the sole exception being that irregular verbs are formed through suppletive stems of the verb that hint at an action that has been completed (i.e. stor-) as stated above in other tenses where suppletion occurs in irregular verbs. The same applies here as well. With regular verb stems, a prefix u- or ɔ- is employed denoting the non-continuity of the action. Table 27. Affirmative of indicative Future Perfect Simple of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ ʃe sɑm ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u ʃe sɑm `stɔril-a-u Ti ‘You’ ʃe si ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u ʃe si `stɔril-a-u Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ ʃe je ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u ʃe je `stɔril-a-u Ne ‘We’ ʃe si`me ɔ-grɑd-`il-i ʃe si`me `stɔril-i Ve ‘You’ ʃe si`te ɔ-grɑd-`il-i ʃe si`te `stɔril-i Te ‘They’ ʃe sɑ ɔ-grɑd-`il-i ʃe sɑ `stɔril-i Present Perfect Continuous The Present Perfect Continuous differs in that an inversion occurs because the auxiliary sɑm cannot be sentence initial, particularly given that Pomak is a null-subject language and avoids unnecessary inclusions of the subject. Hence, the Negative is formed normally with the addition of the negator particle ne/ni not only before the 62 63 auxiliary verb sɑm in the Affirmative but also before the subject. Pomak does not allow the auxiliary sɑm to be sentence initial without an overt subject. Therefore, the negator ne/ni obligatorily appears before the auxiliary in order to remedy the situation. However, the particle can appear in its expected position if the subject is overtly stated as shown below. Table 28. Affirmative of indicative Present Perfect Continuous of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ sɑm grɑd-`il-a-u sɑm `prɑvil-a-u Ti ‘You’ si grɑd-`il-a-u si `prɑvil-a-u Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ je grɑd-`il-a-u je `prɑvil-a-u Ne ‘We’ si`me grɑd-`il-i si`me `prɑvil-i Ve ‘You’ si`te grɑd-`il-i si`te `prɑvil-i Te ‘They’ sɑ grɑd-`il-i sɑ `prɑvil-i E.g. Ne sɑm `prɑvi l-a-u. NEG. 1stSG.PRES.,sɑm PART.-stem `prɑv MSC.-FEM.-NTR. Ungrammatical :Sɑm ne `prɑvil-a-u. 1stSG.PRES.,sɑm NEG. PART.-stem `prɑv MSC.-FEM.-NTR. BUT : Jæ sɑm ne `prɑvil-a-u. 1st.PR. 1stSG.PRES.,sɑm NEG. PART.-stem `prɑv MSC.-FEM.-NTR. I have not been making/doing. The Question is formed with an inversion between the auxiliary and the participle form of the main verb. The auxiliary moves sentence finally for reasons that have to do with the fact that a direct subjetless auxiliary cannot be sentence initial. Hence, the auxiliary moves to last position even after the question marker li. Despite the sentence with an overt subject for the auxiliary being sentence initial and the 63 64 avoidance of inversion, it still occurs rarely but is an infrequent construction without meaning that it is umgrammatical however. E.g. (Jæ) `prɑvil-a-u li sɑm ? 1st.PR. PART.`prɑvem. Q.PART. 1stSG.PRES.,sɑm Have I been making/doing? *(Jæ) sɑm `prɑvil-a-u li? 1st.PR. 1stSG.PRES.,sɑm PART.`prɑvem. Q.PART. Have I been making/doing? The Negative Question is more complicated as the negator particle ne/ni moves to sentence initial position and draws to it the li question particle from its usual sentence final position and no inversion of the auxiliary occurs. E.g. Ne li sɑm `prɑvil-a-u? NEG. Q.PART. 1stSG.PRES.,sɑm PART.`prɑvem. Have I not been making/doing? Present Perfect Simple – Preterite The Present Perfect Simple is identical to the Present Perfect Continuous except for the fact that the former tense uses a suppletive form of the root of the irregular form or morphological markers stated previously to distinguish an action that has begun in the past and has finished recently from an action that began in the past and is still ongoing. Table 29. Affirmative of indicative Present Perfect Simple - Preterite of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ sɑm ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u sɑm `stɔril-a-u Ti ‘You’ si ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u si `stɔril-a-u Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ je ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u je `stɔril-a-u 64 65 Ne ‘We’ si`me ɔ-grɑd-`il-i si`me `stɔril-i Ve ‘You’ si`te ɔ-grɑd-`il-i si`te `stɔril-i Te ‘They’ sɑ ɔ-grɑd-`il-i sɑ `stɔril-i Past Perfect Continuous The Past Perfect Continuous and Past Perfect Simple Pomak tenses are identical to their Present Perfect Continuous and Present Perfect Simple forms with the sole exception being that the auxiliary sɑm is in the past (i.e. bex). Table 30. Affirmative of indicative Past Perfect Continuous of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ bex grɑd-`il-a-u bex `prɑvil-a-u Ti ‘You’ be grɑd-`il-a-u be `prɑvil-a-u Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ be`ʃe grɑd-`il-a-u be`ʃe `prɑvil-a-u Ne ‘We’ bex`me grɑd-`il-i bex`me `prɑvil-i Ve ‘You’ bex`te grɑd-`il-i bex`te `prɑvil-i Te ‘They’ be`xɑ grɑd-`il-i be`xa `prɑvil-i E.g. Ve bex`te `jæli. YouPL. had been eating. Te be`xɑ ig`rɑli. They had been playing. Tɔ be `dumilu. It had been talking. Negation, Question and Negative Question are formed as shown in the following examples: E.g. Negative: Jæ bex ne `prɑvil-a-u. Question: (Jæ) `prɑvil-a-u li bex ? Negative Question : Ne li bex `prɑvil-a-u? 65 66 Past Perfect Simple – Pluperfect The Past Perfect Simple equivalent tense is identical to the Past Perfect Continuous with the difference being that it is formed through a suppletive stem once again or through morphological marker prefixes that denote that the action began and finished in the past and has no continuity (i.e. {u or ɔ}{na-}, {is-}). E.g. Ti be`ʃe nɑbrɑʃ`nivil. YouSG. had (put) flour. Ve bex`te is`pili. YouPL. had drunk. Table 31. Affirmative of indicative Past Perfect Simple – Pluperfect of `grɑdem “I build” and prɑvem “I make/do”. VERBS: `grɑdem “I build” AND `prɑv-em ‘I make/do’ Jæ ‘I’ bex ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u bex `stɔril-a-u Ti ‘You’ be ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u be `stɔril-a-u Tɔj-Tæ-Tɔ ‘He/She/It’ be`ʃe ɔ-grɑd-`il-a-u be`ʃe `stɔril-a-u Ne ‘We’ bex`me ɔ-grɑd-`il-i bex`me `stɔril-i Ve ‘You’ bex`te ɔ-grɑd-`il-i bex`te `stɔril-i Te ‘They’ be`xa ɔ-grɑd-`il-i be`xɑ `stɔril-i Negation, Question and Negative Question are formed as shown in the following examples: E.g. Negative: Jæ bex ne `stɔr-il-a-u. Question: (Jæ) `stɔr -il-a-u li bex ? Negative Question : Ne li bex `stɔr -il-a-u? 66 67 4.4. Modality Imperative Constructions that involve giving directions, orders, suggestions or commands in Pomak are formed through the Imperative which has two persons only as with most languages; second person singular and second person plural. An overt inclusion of the personal pronoun before the imperative is not necessary and can be dropped due to it being easily inferrable by the verb suffix. The suffix of the prohibitive attaches to the auxiliary verb ni`mɔ (i.e. do not) and the verb remains in its stem form with some irregularities in some verbs as shown in table 33. Table 32. Imperative and prohibitive of `prɑvem ‘make/do’. Imperative Negative Imperative (Prohibitive) - - (Ti) `prɑvi Make/Do! (Ti) ni`mɔ(j) `prɑvi Don’t make/do! - - - - (Ve) `prɑvite Make/Do! (Ve) ni`mɔ(jte) `prɑvi Don’t make/do! - - The imperative and prohibitive suffix can change depending on what the verb ends in the first person indicative present as shown in the table that follows. Table 33. Verbs in the Imperative. Verbs in the imperative Verb 1st SG. PR. Singular Imperative Plural Imperative Gloss Pij-em Pij Pijte Drink Sp-øm Spej `Spejte Sleep `Glød-ɑm `Glødɑj `Glødɑjte Look Jæm Jeʃ `Jeʃte Eat `Rɑbutem `Rɑbuti `Rɑbutite work 67 68 Table 34. Verbs in the prohibitive. Verbs in the prohibitive Verb 1stSG. Singular Plural Goss PR. Imperative Imperative Pij-em Ni`mɔj pi Ni`mɔjte pi Don’t drink Sp-øm Ni`mɔj spɑ Ni`mɔjte spɑ Don’t sleep `Glød-ɑm Ni`mɔj `glødɑ Ni`mɔjte `glødɑ Don’t look Jæm Ni`mɔj je Ni`mɔjte je Don’t eat `Rɑbutem Ni`mɔj `rɑbuti Ni`mɔjte `rɑbuti Don’t work The prohibitive verb ni`mɔj/te (i.e. do not) is inflected for person and number instead of the verb. The suffix shifts from the verb to the prohibition marker and the verb remains in its stem form and unconjugated. Subjunctive The Subjunctive form in Pomak follows the same conjugation rules as the verb in the Indicative form preceded by a subjunctive marker morpheme da. The subjunctive expresses the desire of someone or something that they or somebody or something else do something. Additionaly, it shows things that do not reflect reality as it is but rather the hypotheses, conditions as well as expectations of the speakers. The Subjunctive form has only the following Pomak tenses. The negative is formed with the negator particle ni after the subjunctive particle da. Subjunctive Question and Subjunctive Negative Question do not exist in Pomak. 1) Present Continuous E.g. Jæ `iʃtɑm dɑ `prɑvem. 1stPR. 1stSG.PRES.,`iʃtɑm SUBJ.,to 1stSG.SUBJ.PRES.PROG.`prɑvem. 68 69 I want (that I) be making/doing. 2) Present Simple E.g. Jæ `iʃtɑm dɑ `stɔrem.. 1stPR. 1stSG.PRES.,`iʃtɑm SUBJ.,to 1stSG.SUBJ.PRES.prɑvem. I want (that I) make/do. 3) Present Perfect Continuous E.g. Jæ `iʃtɑm dɑ sɑm 1stPR. 1stSG.PRES.,`iʃtɑm SUBJ.,to 1st.SG.PRES.AUX.sɑm `prɑvil-ɑ-u. 1stSG.SUBJ.PRES.PROG.`prɑvem. I want (that I) have been making/doing. 4) Present Perfect Simple – Preterite E.g. Jæ `iʃtɑm dɑ sɑm 1stPR. 1stSG.PRES.,`iʃtɑm SUBJ.,to 1st.SG.PRES.AUX.sɑm `stɔril-ɑ-u 1stSG.SUBJ.PRES.`prɑvem. I want (that I) have made/done. 5) Past Perfect Continuous E.g. Jæ `iʃtɑm dɑ bex 1stPR. 1stSG.PRES.,`iʃtɑm SUBJ.,to 1st.SG.PAST.AUX.sɑm `prɑvil-ɑ-u. 1stSG.SUBJ.PRES.PROG.`prɑvem. I want (that I) had been making/doing. 6) Past Perfect Simple – Pluperfect 69 70 E.g. Jæ `iʃtɑm dɑ bex 1stPR. 1stSG.PRES.,`iʃtɑm SUBJ.,to 1st.SG.PAST.AUX.sɑm `stɔril-ɑ-u 1stSG.SUBJ.PRES.`prɑvem. I want (that I) had made/done. Pomak may as well exhibit other forms of modality such as the hortatitve or other but they constitute areas that the author intends to study for further research. 70 71 5. BORROWINGS The Pomak language is a South East Slavic language and hence most of its vocabulary material is Slavic in nature. However, given Pomak’s history throughout the years filled with conquests and domination by other cultures and languages, a large body of lexical items is of foreign origin and has entered the language through borrowings. In addition, given the agrarian nature of Pomak speakers, there has never been much interest into more sophisticated aspects of life. Therefore, Pomak has had a void which was easily filled with borrowings rather than with coinage of new words when the need for a term arose. My findings have shown that Turkish word borrowings usually cover more usual and daily aspects of life whilst Greek word borrowings cover more specialized vocabulary that either has to do with the fields of technology, science, and studies or abstractions and abstract ideas that do not find a Pomak equivalent. Turkish and Greek borrowings “Depending on the individual situation, family background or village, there is a language-shift or even language-loss for the benefit of Turkish and Greek” (Manova, 2011:263). A large part of Pomaks and particularly the younger generation have gradually all the bigger contact with other parts of Greece and the Greek language in general. This is evidenced in the preponderance of Greek words and Greek speech interrupting the Pomak speech of the speakers in the recordings from the present thesis. Greek becomes all the more salient in Pomak speech and now begs the question: have those Greek vocabulary items crossed the line dividing simple use of a different language words, “codeswitching” as Adamou (2010:152) calls it, or have they become integrated and been adopted as borrowings into Pomak and hence, can be considered as 71 72 much Pomak as Greek? This is a difficult question to which a tentative answer can be given in this thesis, although the author is more inclined to acknowledge them as Pomak, as more instances of contact with Greek have as a result, an in-progress influx of Hellenicisms into Pomak which can therefore, lead us to probably acknowledge the Greek consonantal sounds of ð, θ, ɣ as Pomak phonemes too, apart from being Greek. Greek loan words in the recordings The approximately 74 minute recorded material used for the present thesis is rich with Greek borrowings and instances of use of Greek. This is particularly evident in young adult speakers of Pomak where the Pomak is so frequently interrupted by Greek that it can be considered a byproduct of linguistic fusion of the two languages. One could venture and claim they speak Greco-Pomak rather than Pomak. Table 35. Greek words manifested in the recordings. Pomak Greek Gloss `ɣipsɔ (1,26) γύψος plaster `nɑrkɔsi (1,30) νάρκωση narcosis/sedation `vðelɑ (1,39) βδέλα leech ðimɔti`kɔ (1,46) δημοτικό elementary (school) ɣim`nɑsiɔ (1,50) γυμνάσιο junior highschool `licɔ (1,50) λύκειο senior highschool prɔb`lem (1,82) πρόβλημα problem eksetɑsti`ki (1,86) εξεταστική exam period perpɑ`turɑ (6,79) περπατούρα walker pɑ`reɑ (1,101) παρέα group of friends Kɑ`limɑtɑ (6,281) καλύμματα covers plin`dirje (6,263) πλυντήριο washing machine pti`hiɔ (1,91) πτυχίο certificate/degree prɑkti`ki (1,92) πρακτική practice `melɔn (1,116) μέλλον future `sinɔrɑ (2,8) σύνορα borders ɑngɑ`ries (2,14) αγγαρεία chore ipire`siɑ (2,17) υπηρεσία service 72 73 skɔp`jes (2,49) σκοπιά watch (in military) `stɑsi (2,52) στάση stop Sɑvɑtɔ`kiriɑkɔ Σαββατοκύριακο weekend (2,260) pe`ripɔlɑ (2,49) περίπολο patrol `xɔrɔs (2,51) χώρος space metɑptixiɑ`kɔ μεταπτυχιακό Master’s degree (2,124) ɑt`mɔsferɑ (2,171) ατμόσφαιρα atmosphere sindɑ`ɣi (3,4) συνταγή receipe `kilu (3,9) κιλό kilo `ftɑsvɑ (3,57) φτάνω arrive me`tɑfrɑsi (4,53) μετάφραση translation tile`ɔrɑsi (4,120) τηλεόραση television filɔlɔ`ɣiɑ (4,139) φιλολογία philology ðiɑ`stɑvrɔsinu διασταύρωση crossroads (5,11) fisikɔθerɑ`piɑ φυσικοθεραπεία physiotherapy (5,35) ɑ`nɑlɔɣɑ (3,62) ανάλογα depending/analogically epire`ɑzete (3,64) επηρεάζεται affected/inluenced `lɑmbinkɑnɑ λάμπα lamp (3,69) eksɑt`mizete (3,87) εξατμίζομαι evaporate `mesɔn (4,5) μέσον means nɑfpi`ɣiɑ (4,31) ναυπηγείο shipyard enðjɑ`ferɔn (4,54) ενδιαφέρον interest ɑθlitiz`mɔ (5,56) αθλητισμός sport `siɣurɑ (5,59) σίγουρα surely/certainly ikɔðɔ`mes (5,81) οικοδομή building erɣɔ`lɑvɔs (5,82) εργολάβος contractor As evidenced above where the words are given as they appear in the recordings and not in the nominative case or the first person singular if they are verbs, Greek vocabulary in Pomak is usually specialised and most often has to do with technology, professions, science and less frequently with day-to-day ordinary things. Pomak has a limited purely Pomak-originating lexis which probably directly correlates with the insularity of the region. Loan words for novel concepts and technology was adopted from both Greek and Turkish. “Greek and Turkish loan words can be found in all Bulgarian dialects, particularly those in the south of Bulgaria, but in Pomak the number 73 74 of such loan words is much higher” (Stojkov 1993: 130-131, in Sandry, 2013:21). Manova believes that “the most common linguistic process involved in the lexical modernization of the dialects spoken by the Pomaks is the extensive borrowing from both Turkish and Greek” (2011:269). Greek loan words are usually more specialized and usually technology or science related, whilst Turkish loan words are more colloquial and day-to-day words. The recordings show that the older the Pomak speaker is, irrespective of dialectal variation, the more he tends to use more authentic Pomak words and Turkish loan words instead of Greek. The younger the speaker is, the more he tends to use Greek. This is probably attributable to the social changes that Pomak societies have undergone throughout the years after the lifting of the military zones and checkpoints by the Greek government which also encouraged the pursuit of secondary and tertiary education in Greek universities. Turkish loan words in the recordings The table that follows shows examples of Turkish loan words present in the recordings. Turkish borrowings are more present in the speech of older and more proficient Pomak speakers compared to younger adults. Table 36. Turkish words manifested in the recordings. Pomak Turkish Gloss dyɲ`øsɑ (1,10) dünya Earth tʃek`mɑtsi (1,14) çakmak lighter ɑstɑ`nenɑ (1,20) hastane hospital ɑmeli`jæt (1,21) ameliyat surgery hɑf`tɑ (1,25) hafta week ɔjyn`dʒætsi (1,32) oyuncak toy 74 75 meh`tep (1,45) mehtep school ty`tyn (1,62) tütün tobacco pɑ`rine (1,67) para money i`lætʃvene (1,68) ilaç medicine ɑj (1,76) ay month `dersene (1,84) ders lesson/course `Jælnɯs (1,86) yalnız only/alone/solely ɑrkɑ`dɑʃe (1,97) arkadaş friend bɑh`tʃene (1,142) bahçe garden hɑs`ker (2,2) asker soldier ɑlɯʃ`tisɑxme alışıyorum get used to (2,11) sɑ`bɑlɑhin (2,13) sabahleyin in the morning gyn (2,43) gün day `hesɑbiʃ (2,134) hesab etmek reckon/calculate/t hink `Xɑnø (2,142) hane family tehlike`li (2,222) tehlike dangerous myse`fire (2,249) müsefir guest zɔr (2,258) zor difficult/hard tʃej`rek (3,9) çeyrek a quarter ɑ`ʃɑ jukɑ`rɯ aşağa yukarı more or less (3,24) zej`tin (3,32) zeytin oil dekɑ`kɑ (3,35) dakika minute tep`tsønɑ (3,54) tepsi plate sɯdʒɑk`lɯkɑn sıcaklık temperature (3,61) udɑ`jønɑ (3,61) oda room hɑv`lɯje (1,79) havlu towel `Dʒæbɑ (4,11) caba free (of charge)/in vain re`hɑt (4,15) rahat relaxed/comforta ble hyky`mete (4,37) hükümet country øøretmen`like öğretmenlik teaching (4,46) kɑsɑ`bi (4,72) kasaba town/city ɑjrɯl`disvɑme ayrılıyorum separate (4,94) bɑj`ræm (4,105) bayram celebration jɑr`dɯm (8,15) yardım help/assistance ker`mes (8,19) kermez auction kullɑn`disvɑ (8,22) kullanıyorum use pɑ`zɑr (8,27) pazar bazaar fi`jæt (8,29) fiyat price fɑz`litsɑ (8,35) fazla a lot been`disvɑm beeniyorum like (8,50) 75 76 `hɔdʒɑ (4,186) hoca teacher mes`lek (5,62) meslek profession sene`de (5,106) sene year pɑr`tʃe (5,127) parça part/segment de`nizene (5,149) deniz sea mej`dɑnɑ (5,152) meydan time/spare time dø`lym (5,153) dölüm acre jɑn`lɯʃ (5,174) yanlış wrong sɑf`rɔ (6,5) sofra meal hiz`met (6,7) hizmet service mɑs`rɑfɑ (6,9) masraf expense/trouble Zɑ`rɑr (6,10) zarar harmful ɑ`bere (6,15) haber news gez`mø (6,44) gezme trip/travel `bu`gyn (6,49) bugün today je`vɑʃ (6,54) yavaş slow/quiet fil`dʒæn (6,67) fincan cup bɑr`dɑk (6,67) bardak glass terke`lekɑte (6,81) tekerlek wheel sɔ`bɑsɑ (6,213) soba fireplace se`bepɔn (6,226) sebep reaseon/cause per`dø (6,268) perde curtain sɑ`ɑt (7,9) saat hour/clock hɑ`zɯr (7,64) hazır ready `ɑnne (7,81) anne mother `sɔpɑtɑ (7,84) sopa beating Mɯzɯr`lɯk mızırlık gossip (7,219) mezɑr`lɯtsine mezarlık graveyard (7,270) ɔrtɑ`dɑ (7,279) orta center Pomak as a language has adopted the Turkish way of cardinal and ordinal numbering in all Pomak dialects. One witnesses the strange phenomenon of counting normally using Slavic origin words up to number four and in some dialects up to five, and then there appears to be an abrupt change to Turkish. This holds true not only for cardinal numbers but also for ordinal numbers. In addition, time-telling, age-telling and use of temporal expressions is also done through Turkish borrowings. The use of native Pomak words for numbering, ordering, time-telling, age-telling and temporal expressions is limited usually to derivatives of the first four or five numbers. This is 76 77 explainable by the universal borrowability hierarchy by Matras (2007:51). According to which “numerals enter languages through the dominance of the second language in formal and business transactions, through education and other forms of institutional discourse” (Matras, 2007:51). In addition, “knowledge of the indigenous system of numerals is reported to be in decline, and the younger generation shows a clear preference for borrowed numerals” (Matras, 2007:51). Pomak appears to follow the borrowability hierarchy to such a degree that explains the borrowing of numerals, time expressions. The initial examples are of Proto Indo-European origin which is still in use upto the numeral five, beyond which there appears a shift to Turkic numbering. Table 37. Table showing numbering, temporal expressions and counting through the use of Turkish word borrowings. The words with the asterisk (*) indicate Pomak words of Proto Indo-European origin that are still in employment. Pomak Turkish Gloss *dvɑ (6,3) - two *dve-tri (4,23) - two-three *tri (3,50) - three *plu`vinɑ (3,9) - half *jen`nɔ (2,41) - one *dve (1,99) - two *jæ`din (1,76) - one *pet (1,3) - five Beʃin`dʒinu (1,3) beşinci fifth je`di (1,20) yedi seven `ɔniki (1,90) oniki twelve kɯrk (1,139) kırk forty el`li (1,139) elli fifty birin`dʒi (4,147) birinci first Jyz (5,13) yüz a hundred `Bugyn (6,51) bugün today jirmi`dørt (7,9) yirmidört twentyfour `ɔnsekis (7,59) onsekiz eighteen jɑʃɯn`dɑ (1,139) yaşında years old i`ki but`ʃyk (2,6) iki buçuk two and a half sɑ`bɑlɑhin (2,13) sabahleyin in the morning jirmii`ki (2,43) yirmiiki twentytwo gyn (2,43) gün day ɑl`tijys (2,122) altıyüz six hundred ikin`dʒi (4,148) ikinci second dørtyn`dʒy (5,188) dördüncü fourth 77 78 `ɔnytʃ (7,17) onüç thirteen ɔt`tuz (8,40) ottuz thirty ɑ`ʃɑ jukɑ`rɯ (3,10-11) aşağa yukarı more or less ɔn (3,35) on ten bir (3,71) bir one jir`mi (4,93) yirmi twenty ɑj`ʃæm (4,132) akşam evening ɑl`tɯ (5,10) altı six `ɔniki (6,101) oniki twelve `ɔnɑltɯ (7,23) onaltı sixteen Jirmii`ki but`ʃyk bin yirmiiki buçuk bin twentytwo and a half (8,122) thousand Time telling, counting and numbering upwards of number five, time expressions, indefinites, as well as other common aspects of daily life have been influenced by Turkish. The case of numbering and counting in Pomak is a peculiar one as it employs Slavic words up to number four, or five in some cases, and then altogether switches to Turkish beyond number five. Loan words of different origin in the recordings As is any language, so is Pomak affected by the world lingua franca of English and other languages. Words from other languages are usually scarce yet they still exist and have entered Pomak. They usually have to do with specific articles of clothing, furniture etc. Some English words having to do with contemporary technology and science have found their way into Pomak, as well as some words that have to do with recreation and sports. Table 38. Words borrowed from other languages other than Greek and Turkish. Borrowings from other languages in Pomak Gloss pɑn`tɔlete (1,18) 78 79 `Internetnu (2,111) All in all, the Pomak language and more specifically its lexis, is a fusion of many other languages, cultures and influences with the languages that take the lion’s share being mainly Turkish and Greek. Pomak, despite retaining a large part of its Slavic origin vocabulary, is nowadays more prone to influence from Turkish and Greek and many original Pomak words recede into obsolescence and eventual oblivion as they are spoken less and less and only by the most elderly of Pomak villages. Modernization and the natural yet unavoidable influence by the more dominant cultures and languages signifies drastic changes over the less dominant ones. The Pomak of the elders might sometimes be relatively unintelligible to younger speakers as Pomak gradually ceases to be the prime language spoken in the family and by the youth, and it is replaced by Greek, Turkish or a mixture of those two or three. ‘Authentic’ Pomak loses ground and ‘spurious’ or ‘not true’ Pomak gains ground. Darwinian evolution and natural selection seem to be at play and only the fittest survives and the fittest usually is the one which 79 80 adapts to its surroundings, enriches itself by its surroundings and creates the fittest without it signifying uniformity and homogeneity but ‘endless forms most beautiful and most wonderful’ which are in constant evolution (Darwin, 1859:490). 80 81 6. SYNTAX The Sentence The Pomak language by belonging to the South Slavic languages sub-branch of the Indo-European languages, is a null-subject language (Biberauer, Holmsborg, Roberts, Sheehan , 2010:5). The subject drops whenever it is possible for it to drop without altering the intended meaning. The subject in most cases is omitted as it is entailed in the verbal suffix and would hence, serve no purpose and just be pleonastic unless it is used for emphatic purposes. The subject of the verb is easily inferrable by the suffix at the end of the verb. Additionally, Pomak has a distinct suffix for each person and number which further makes the overt addition of a subject redundant. Language is driven by economy and wherever and whenever something can be saved because it is redundant, it will do so as a principle of language economy and non- redundancy is at play. (3,35-38) `Bɔrkɑm gu `jeʃte ɔn dekɑ`kɑ 1stSG.PRES.`bɔrkɑm OBJ.PR. ADV.more QUANT.ten FEM.PL.,dekɑ`kɔ I bake it more ten minutes ɑ`ʃɑ-jukɑ`rɯ i `ɔstɑvem gu `mɑlku PREP.up-PREP.down CONJ.and 1stSG.PRES.PROG,us`tɑvem OBJ.PR. ADV.little more or less and I leave it a little bit dɑ pu`tʃine, beʃ-ɑl`tɯ dekɑ`kɑ PREP.to 3rdSG.INF.PRES,pu`tʃinvɑm QUANT.five-QUANT.six FEM.PL.,dekɑ`kɔ to rest five-six minutes 81 82 zɑm gu `iskɑrɑm tu`gɑvɑ gu ADV.then OBJ.PR. 1stSG.PRES.PROG. is`kɑrvɑm ADV.then OBJ.PR. then it I take out then it `klɑdɑm nɑ krɔk. 1stSG.PRES.PROG.,`klɑvɑm PREP.on NEU.SG.plank. I put on plank. “I bake it ten more minutes approximately and leave it a bit to rest, 5-6 minutes then I take it out and put it on a wooden plank.” In the above sentence taken from the recordings, the emboldened words constitute indicative verbs and there is no subject for them to agree with because there is no need for the subject to be expressly stated as it would be pleonastic and in this case no emphasis is necessary for it to be expressly stated. The subject for all the above verbs is the first person singular, jæ, and it is inferrable by the suffix –am and its allomorph –em which go only with the first person singular. Having said that, some Pomak dialects when recounting past events, employ a kind of a historic past where the suffix of the verb does not always agree with the subject, yet the subject is still missing. (7,72-75) Ku`gɑnu `beʃe `mutʃek iʃ`tæʃe When-DET. 3rdSG.PAST.PROG,sɑm MASC.ADJ.,little 3rdSG.PAST.PROG`iʃtɑm When I was small he wanted dɑ `stɑnɑm `pɑuer-`rentzer i PREP.to 1stSG.INF.PRES.PROG.,`stɑnvɑm MASC.SG.Power-Ranger CONJ.and to I become Power Ranger `skɑrʃi si glɑ`vɑsɑ. 3rdSG.PAST.PROG.,`skɔrʃyvɑm REF.PR. FEM.SG.DET./proximal, head. 82 83 I broke my head “When I was little I wanted to become a Power Ranger and broke my head” In the above sentence the verbs are all in the third person singular yet they do not agree with a third person singular subject. Instead, and surprisingly they agree with an omitted first person singular. In particular, the first two verbs (i.e. `beʃe and iʃ`tæʃe) agree with the subject of the subjunctive form dɑ `stɑnɑm which includes a suffix that betrays a first person singular. The next verb, `skɑrʃi, is again a case where there is a disharmony between subject and verb suffixation which is remedied by the spatio - temporal anchoring suffix sa which acts as a posessive pronoun and betrays the subject (i.e. sa is used for items on or in the immediate proximity of the speaker) which in turn makes redundant the explicit inclusion of the subject. Pomak is a highly inflectional language and despite including constructions that at first glance would necessitate an explicit mentioning of the subject that the verb agrees with, it is evident that even in seemingly ungrammatical cases as is the historic past where the speaker uses the third person singular to speak about themselves and things that they did, this does not constitute a problem as other forces are called upon to remedy the situation and avoid ungrammaticality and erroneous sentences. A morphological feature alluded to in the morphology section that aids in omitting the subject of verbs are the nominal and adjectival suffixes of –sa/su, -ta/tu, - na/nu which define and situate things and people in space-time and anchor things in reality and have as a point of reference either the addressor or the addressee or another person or thing. Moreover, Pomak is a [pro] drop language meaning that it favours dropping the subject as it is already included in the verbal suffix. It is redundant except if it is for emphatic reasons. “Pro is just like an overt pronoun except that it lacks 83 84 phonetic content” (Franks, 1995:305). However, the subject cannot drop when the verb is the copula ‘sɑm’ and it is sentence initial when the sentence is affirmative and in the indicative. This is contrary to a nearby language, and a very influential one to Pomak ; Greek, which is a thouroughly [pro] drop language even in cases where it has to do with copula constructions. Sentences such as the following are not permitted in Pomak whilst they are thoroughly fine in Greek. (1) Pomak Greek X Sɑm jirmije`di jaʃɯn`dɑ. Είμαι είκοσι επτά χρονών. Am twenty-seven years old. Am twenty seven years old. I am 27 years old. I am 27 years old. VS. Ne sɑm `dɑskɑl. Δεν είμαι δάσκαλος. Not am teacher. Not am teacher. I am not a teacher. I am not a teacher.\ Word Order Pomak is a language belonging to the South East Slavic languages and is very closely related to Bulgarian. Pomak word order structure follows the SVO pattern as does Bulgarian. This word order can be switched depending on emphasis and intention to foreground a particular part of the sentence. The subject is always omitted unless a rule dictates its overt presence as is the case with the verb sɑm ‘be’ which always necessitates an overt subject as shown in (1) and (2). (1) Affirmative: (Jæ)5 `sipem jen`nɔ la`ʒitsɑ `pɔlnɑ… (3,14). S V O (I) pour a spoon full… I pour a spoon full (of)… 5. The subject in parenthesis does not appear in the recordings as it is inferrable by the suffix. 84 85 (Jæ) `Klɑdɑm vrit tes`tɔnu na `negɑ… (3, 46) (I) put all the dough on it…. I do not put all the dough on it… (Jæ) Imɑm jennɔ fɔrmɑ…(4,129) (I) have a tracksuit…. I have a tracksuit…. The word order does not switch in the negative as shown below where the previous examples have been transformed into negative. (2) Negative: (Jæ) ni `sipvɑm jen`nɔ la`ʒitsɑ `pɔlnɑ… (3,14). S V O (I) not pour a spoon full… I do not pour a spoon full (of)… (Jæ) ni `Klɑvɑm vrit tes`tɔnu na `negɑ… (3, 46) (I) not put all the dough on it…. I do not put all the dough on it… (Jæ) Nemɑm jennɔ fɔrmɑ…(4,129) (I) not-have a tracksuit…. I do not have a tracksuit…. (3) Question: Kɑ`nɑ dɑ `stɔriʃ? (7,93) O V What to do? Imperative (4) Positive Imperative: `Ɔstɑvi se ti, jæ beh ɑjn`vɑk den ne uti`ʃøl zɑ`tɔ. (6,215- 216). V S You leave that, I did not go that day for that reason. 85 86 (5) Negative Imperative/Prohibitive: *There is no negative imperative present in the recordings but the above example would be of the sort: “Ni`mɔ ustɑve se ti, jæ beh ɑjn`vɑk den ne uti`ʃøl zɑ`tɔ”. V S Don’t you leave that, I did not go that day for that reason. Negative Pomak constructs the negative with the negation particles ne and ni. The former is usually found with the copula whilst the latter is the archetypal negation particle that also combines with some verbs such as the verb imam (i.e. have) to form `nemam (I do not have) or `iʃtɑm (i.e. I want) to form niʃ`tɔm (i.e. I do not want). Question/Negative question Question is usually formed through the addition of the question particle li at the end of the sentence unless the question is wh-question beginning with kɑk (how), kɑknɑ (what), kugɑ (when), kutrɔ-ɑ-ɔ-i (who/which), tʃi (whose) etc. Consider the following examples: Affirmative: Jæ sɑm `xubɑf. // I am good. Question: `Xubɑf li sɑm (jæ) ? // Am (I) good? The same holds true for negative questions which are formed with the addition of the negator nemɑ (i.e. there is not) before the question particle li as shown in (4). Predicates Predicates in Pomak are dependent and governed by the verb and the kinds of predicates that it allows. Pomak includes, intransitive, transitive, and ditransitive verbs. 86 87 In cases where there is an intransitive verb, the action postulated by the verb has no recipient or the recipient is the same with the subject. In instances where a transitive verb exists in a sentence, there is a benefactor or a recipient of the action stated by the verb. In ditransitive verbs, the verb requires two predicates one of which is the thing undergoing the action stated by the verb, and the other, the benefactor or the recipient of the action. E.g. Intransitive: Sɑ`bɑlɑhin `stɑnvɑme… Morning 1st.PL.PRES.`stɑnvɑm “In the morning we wake up… (2,15)” The verb does not receive an object. Transitive: `Zømɑm gu ɑjn`vɑ fɑf jen`nɔ ku`pɑne 1stSG.PRES. `zimɑm OBJ.PR. that PREP.in QUANT.one FEM.SG.ku`pɑne I-take it that in one bowl gu `sipem. (3,12-13) OBJ.PR. 1stPROG.PR. that I-pour. “I take that and I pour it in a bowl.” Both verbs have the same direct object (i.e. gu/ ɑjn`vɑ). 87 88 Ditransitive: `Mitʃkɔnu be pɑk, hem ADJ.MSC.DEF. 3rdAUX.PAST ADV.again, ADV.only The-young was again, only `sitʃkɔ `prɑveʃe `bɑbi pɑk… (6,103-104) SG.NEUT. 3rdPROG.PAST.`pravem DAT.SG.FEM.`bɑba ADV.again all-things was doing to granny “The young one though, not only was he doing all kinds of things to granny…” The verb here receives a direct object (i.e. `sitʃkɔ) and an indirect object (`bɑbi). Subject verb non-agreement A recent development that is present in the speech of many Pomaks especially of younger generations is the use of third person singular verb forms with the first person singular as subject when narrating past events. Additionally, this phenomenon is overgeneralized by some as they substitute the first and second person singular inflections for the third person inflection. There seems to be a tendency towards a general use of the third person singular form for all persons of the singular in most dialects despite there being different inflected forms for each person. The reason behind this may be attributable to younger generations’ frequent contact with and use of other languages which inevitably leads to their Pomak becoming affected. E.g. At `pɔrvutu mi sɑ `zglævɑʃe `jættse PREP., from ADJ.NTR.SG, first OBJ.PR. REF.PR. 3rdSG.IMP., seem ADV., a lot At first me myself it-seemed a-lot 88 89 be`læ i sæ `ɔti pɔ ADV. hard, CONJ. and ADV., now CONJ., because ADV. more difficult and now because more ɑlɯʃ`tisɑx `mifku, `videx `derse, 1stSG.PAST, ɑlɯʃ`tisvɑm ADV. a bit 1stSG.PAST. `glødɑm MSC.PL. lesson I-got-used-to a-bit I-saw lessons `xɔdeʃe nɑ hɑstɑ`nø, `videʃɔ 3rdSG.IMP. `xɔdem, PREP.,to FEM.SG., hospital 3rdSG.IMP. `glødɑm it-was-going to hospital it-was-seeing … (5,180-186) “From the beginning it seemed to me very difficult and now because I got used to it a bit, saw courses, went to the hospital, saw ….” The emboldened verbs above constitute cases where there is non-agreement between verb inflection and verb subject. In both cases, the subject of the verbs is the first person singular (i.e. jæ) yet the verb inflections are of the second or third person singular (e.g. `xɔdeʃe or `videʃɔ). Clitics Clitics as morphemes, bear syntactic characteristics of a word, but are usually phonologically dependent on words or phrases that precede or follow them. They most often attach to a host which is usually a predicate and most often take the form of 89 90 pronouns, determiners or adpositions. They can be attached to a word as an affix or be present as a separate word. (3,97-99) Ud`mɑxnɑm gu tu`gɑvɑ i `kɔmuʃte 1stSG.PR. ud`mɑxkɑm CLITIC ADV.,then CONJ.,and MSC.SG. whoever Take out it then and whoever dɑ sɑm `dɑvɑl ud ɑjn`vɑk PREP. AUX.sam PRTC. `dɑvɑm PREP.from DET.MSC.SG. to be given from that xlæp, vrit mi gu MSC.SG. bread, ADJ, everybody CLITIC CLITIC bread everybody mine it been`disvɑt i `iʃtɑt mi sindɑ`ɣinu. 3rdPL.PR. been`disvɑt CONJ, and 3rdPL.PR`iʃtɑmCLITIC OBL.FEM.SG. like and want me recipe “I take it out then and whosever I may have given from that bread, everybody likes it and they want from me the recipe”. The above sentence presents two clitics: the mi clitic agrees with the indirect/recipient predicate and functions as a posessive pronoun with respect to the direct predicate (i.e. xlæp), whilst the second clitic gu agrees with the direct/theme predicate (i.e. xlæp) on its own right and functions as an object pronoun. Gu agrees for number with the predicate as well as gender but there is no case distinction in it. Gu 90 91 agrees for number and case with it being the singular masculine and singular neuter variant and gi the plural variant. The feminine singular variant clitic is je . Hence, the host of the clitic can be identified by the number and case it appears in. The singular clitic always agrees with singular number predicates and the plural always with plural number predicates. Mass nouns that function as predicates are always treated as singular when it comes to the clitic that can substitute them. Indirect object clitics apart from number and gender, also agree with person with allomorphs such as si, ti, mu-xi-mu, -, vi, mi except for first person plural which weirdly enough does not exist and has a suppletive periphrastic form. Sandry provides a table (2013:154) where she distinguishes between long and short oblique and long and short dative forms where she provides mi as the first person plural dative short form (or first person plural indirect object clitic) which is not the case as it is always understood that the indirect object in that case is third person plural. Spatio-temporal deictics do not help either as they do not solve ambiguity. There does not seem to exist a first person plural indirect object clitic marker. Instead, other periphrastic means are employed to convey that meaning. Table 39. Direct and indirect object clitics in Pomak. Direct object clitic Indirect object clitic 1st Singular si 2nd Singular gu/je ti 3rd Singular mu-xi-mu 1st Plural - 2nd Plural gi vi 3rd Plural mi Clitic doubling Pomak is a higly inflected language and it favors the use of pronouns and clitics for reasons such as avoidance of constant repetition of previously mentioned subjects 91 92 and predicates. Yet it also presents clitic doubling in some instances and it is usually used for emphatic purposes. Clitic doubling, is a phenomenon by which clitic pronouns appear in verb phrases together with the full noun phrases that they refer to. Clitic doubling appears to be an optional feature of Pomak as in most cases, when the clitic doubling is removed, the sentence is still grammatical and can stand on its own. E.g. `Zømɑm gu ɑjn`vɑ fɑf jen`nɔ ku`pɑne gu `sipem. (3,12-13) I take that and I pour it in a bowl. Other similar examples provided by the author are: `Nɑdenɑm gi ɑj`ses `dripi… I wear these clothes. Nɑ`gɑdɑm gi aj`nes udɑ`je… I sort/repair those rooms… In the above sentence, there is a case of double clitics. The clitic gu exists along with the direct object it is supposed to refer i.e. (ɑjn`vɑ) without contributing much to the meaning of the sentence. The inclusion of ɑjn`vɑ functions for purposes of emphasis and clarification. The above constitute instances of some syntactic characteristics of Pomak present in the recordings. Pomak exhibits many similarities with other Slavic languages and as it belongs in the same Sprachbund with them 92 93 Conclusion The present thesis has been an attempt at shedding some light and native speaker insights at a understudied minority language. Pomak presents a profusion of dialectal differences in a very small geographical area where the kilometrical distances are such that make this dialectal variation paradoxical. The present thesis has been an attempt to present the Pomak language purely linguistically from the viewpoint of a native speaker. Thoroughly academic work on Pomak by a native speaker is scarce to the present thesis’ author’s knowledge. Additionally, the present thesis presents some general phenomena that occur in Pomak in general and not a particular dialectal variation of Pomak as usually done. In particular, the present thesis’s findings concerning phonology are that Pomak exhibits vowel change, consonant elision, L-vocalization, deaffrication of tʃ to ʃ in some dialects while also affrication of ʒ to dʒ in other dialects, final stop devoicing, vowel alternation, consonant alternation, vowel syncope, and that stress unmarked position is the penultimate syllable. As regards morphology, nouns inflect for gender, number, and case, deadjectival noun formation is infrequent and mostly of foreign origin. In addition Pomak exhibits, augmentative and diminutive forms. Moreover, verbs inflect for person, number, tense, and aspect, while also that comparative and superlative adjectival and adverbial forms are formed periphrastically. Additionally, there are 3 gender noun distinctions with 4 cases (NOM, DAT, OBL, VOC) with no GEN./possessive case, that there exist determiners –s, -t, -n, which function as spatio- temporal anchors depending on speaker/addressee or time referred. Furthermore, there seems not to exist a tense for momentous present action despite a continuous form 93 94 generally existing which is formed through suppletion. Also, there exists a perfective aspect which is formed with sam ‘be’ auxiliary in Present and Past forms as well as there existing forms of modality such as the Imperative/Prohibitive and Subjunctive. As regards lexis, Pomak exhibits Turkish, Greek, and English loanwords, whilst as regards syntax, Pomak exhibits subject-dropping as it is a null-subject language by default. However, sam ‘be’ is an exception which always necessitates a direct subject. Also, determiners can indicate the subject. There are 3 types of predicates depending on whether the verb is intransitive, transitive, or ditransitive as well as there being a Subject-Verb non-agreement present in the speech of younger speakers. Moreover, Pomak exhibits clitics and clitic doubling phenomena. The present thesis began with no presuppositions and preconceptions about a ‘right’ and ‘correct’ dialect of Pomak. To our mind there is no ‘right’ and ‘correct’ or ‘authentic’ and ‘pure’ Pomak dialect. Given that Old Church Slavonic, the Pomak language is descended from, is an extinct language, no such sweeping generalisation can be safely made. The present thesis tried to focus on common denominators among the dialects and only occasionally stress stark contrasts between the dialects, and in this way posit that those common denominators may be part of an earlier form of the language. Despite the speakers and number of recordings not being equally spread per dialect, no preference or superiority is given to any. Insights regarding Pomak in general are stipulated based on the recorded data and the author’s intuitions as a native speaker of Pomak, and it is not the case that they hold equally and unanismously for all dialects. Pomak as a language is marginally studied and this present thesis only scratches the surface with respect to the information and material that is still available for study. Given the preponderance of Pomak dialects, each of which is very distinct and exhibits 94 95 variations that occassionally make it difficult for them to be discerned, a study encompassing most if not all the Pomak dialects is in order so as to shed further light on Pomak, validate or disprove previous claims, fathom what the general common denominators between the dialects are, and come up with how a Standard Pomak dialect would look like. Additionally, a historic research on Pomak should be done tracing the influences on Pomak through history and the gradual change of Pomak to its present multifarious dialectal form. 95 96 References Aarbakke, Vermund. (2012). Pomak Language Usage and the Spell of Nationalism— The Case of the Pomaks in Greece, in Slavia Islamica: language, religion and identity, edited by Robert D. Greenberg, Motoki Nomachi, Slavic Eurasian studies, Slavic Research Center, Hokkaido University, 25:149-177. Adamou, Evangelia (2013). Change and Variation in a Trilingual Setting: Evidentiality in Pomak (Slavic, Greece). I. Léglise & C. Chamoreau. The interplay of variation and change in contact settings, Benjamins, pp.229-252, 2013, Studies in language variation. ------(2012). Verb morphologies in contact: evidence from the Balkan area. In : Morphologies in contact, M. Vanhove, T. Stolz, A. Urdze & H. Otsuka (eds). Berlin, Akademie Verlag, 143-162. ------(2011). Temporal uses of Definite Articles and Demonstratives in Pomak (Slavic, Greece), Lingua 121(5): 871-889 (1-28). ------(2010).Bilingual speech and language ecology in Greek Thrace: Romani and Pomak in contact with Turkish, Language in Society 39:2, 147-171. Arvaniti, Amalia (2007). "Greek Phonetics: The State of the Art". Journal of Greek Linguistics. 8: 97–208. Biberauer, Theresa, & Holmsborg, Anders, & Roberts, Ian, & Sheehan, Michelle. (2010). Parametric Variation: Null Subjects in Minimalist Theory. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. Culioli, Antoine. (1971). À propos d’opérations intervenant dans le traitement formel des langues naturelles. Mathématiques et Sciences humaines 34, 7–15, in Adamou, Evangelia (2011), Temporal uses of Definite Articles and Demonstratives in Pomak (Slavic, Greece), Lingua 121(5) : 871-889 (1-28). 96 97 Darwin, Charles. (1859). On the Origin of Species, London: John Murray. Eminov, Ali. (2007). Social Construction of Identities: Pomaks in Bulgaria, European Centre for Minority Issues, JEMIE 6 (2), 1-25. Franks, Steven. (1995). Parameters of Slavic Morphosyntax. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. Gippert, Jost, & Himmelmann, P. Nikolaus, & Mosel, Ulrike (eds.). Essentials of Language Documentation. Berlin, Germany: Walter De Gruyter. Jobov, Vladimir. (2004). Sounds in Bulgarian Language. Semarsh, Bulgaria. [Жобов, Владимир (2004), Звуковете в българския език, Семарш.] Kokkas, Nikolaos. (2004). Uchem so pomatsko, lessons in the Pomak language: 25 lessons. Vol I. Xanthi, Greece: Culture and Development Center of Thrace. [Κόκκας, Νικόλαος. (2004). Uchem so pomatsko, μαθήματα πομακικής γλώσσας: 25 μαθήματα. Τόμ. I. Ξάνθη, Ελλάδα: Πολιτιστικό Αναπτυξιακό Κέντρο Θράκης.] Mela-Athanasopoulou, Elizabeth. (2014). Kalasha Grammar, based on fieldwork research. Thessaloniki, Greece: University Studio Press. Mela-Athanasopoulou, Elizabeth. (2011). First Steps to Language Documentation: The Kalash Language, a Case Study. Indian Journal of Applied Linguistics, 37:2, 83-100. Mela-Athanasopoulou, Elizabeth. (2006). Linguistic Morphology: For Greek University students. Thessaloniki, Greece: Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, Department of Theoretical and Applied Linguistics, School of English, Faculty of Philosophy, (6-8). 97 98 Manova, Maria. (2011). On some recent Pomak writing activities in Greece: Ethno - cultural context and linguistic peculiarities, Eesti ja some-ugri keeleteaduse ajakiri, 2:1, 261-272. Matras, Yaron. (2007). The borrowability of structural categories. In Y. Matras & J. Sakel (eds.) Grammatical borrowing in cross-linguistic survey, 31–73. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter. Michail, Domna. (2003). “From ‘Locality’ to ‘European Identity’: Shifting Identities among the Pomak minority in Greece”, 2nd Conference of the International Association of Southestern Anthropology, Graz, 1-21. Mosel, Ulrike. (2006). Fieldwork and community language work. In Gippert, Jost, & Himmelmann, P. Nikolaus, & Mosel, Ulrike (eds.) (2006). Essentials of Language Documentation. Berlin, Germany: Walter De Gruyter, 67-85. Panagiotidis, Nathanael. (1997). Pomaks and their language. Alexandroupolis: Gnomi. [Παναγιωτίδης, Ναθαναήλ. (1997). Οι Πομάκοι και η γλώσσα τους. Αλεξανδρούπολη: Γνώμη.] Papadimitriou, Panagiotis, & Dimopoulοs, Panagiotis, & Doulopoulos, Georgios, & Karahotza, Ritvan, & Moumin, Aintin. (1996). Grammar of the Pomak language. Xanthi : 4th Military Corps. [Παπαδημητρίου, Παναγιώτης, & Δημόπουλος, Παναγιώτης, & Δουλόπουλος, Γεώργιος, & Καραχοτζά, Ριτβάν & Μουμίν, Αϊντίν. (1996). Γραμματική πομακικής γλώσσας. Ξάνθη: Δ’ Σ..Σ.] Pilbrow, Tim (1997). "The Nation and its Margins: Negotiating a National Identity in Post-1989 Bulgaria". Anthropology of East Europe Review (Field and International Study Program, College of Human Ecology, Cornell University 98 99 [and] Dept. of Sociology and Anthropology, Central Connecticut State University) 15 (2): 68. Poulton, Hugh. (1993). The Balkans: Minorities and States in Conflict, Minority Rights Group Publications, London, New ed. Radford, Andrew, & Atkinson, Martin, & Britain, David, & Clahsen, Harald, & Spencer, Andrew. (2009). Linguistics: An introduction. 2nd ed., Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. Sandry, Susan. (2013) Phonology and morphology of Paševik Pomak with notes on the verb and fundamentals of syntax. Masters thesis, UCL: London). Seyppel, Tatjana. (1989). "The Pomaks of Northeastern Greece: an endangered Balkan population", Journal of Institute of Muslim Minority Affairs 10 (42). Stojkov, Stojko. (1971). Говорът на с. Мугла, Девинско. Известия на института за български език 20: 3-90, in Sandry, Susan. (2013) Phonology and morphology of Paševik Pomak with notes on the verb and fundamentals of syntax. Masters thesis, UCL (University College London). Sussex, Roland, & Cubberley, Paul. (2006). The Slavic Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Ternes, Elmer, & Vladimirova-Buhtz, Tatjana (1999), "Bulgarian", Handbook of the International Phonetic Association, Cambridge University Press, pp. 55–57. Theoharidis, P. (1995). Pomaks: The Muslims of Rhodope (History, decent, language, religion, folk lore). Xanthi, Greece: Culture and Development Center of Thrace. [Θεοχαρίδης, Π. (1995). Πομάκοι: Οι Μουσουλμάνοι της Ροδόπης (Ιστορία, 99 100 καταγωγή, γλώσσα, θρησκεία, λαογραφικά). Ξάνθη, Ελλάδα: Πολιτιστικό Αναπτυξιακό Κέντρο Θράκης.] Turan, Ömer. (1999). Pomaks, their past and present, Journal of Muslim Minority Affairs, 19:1, 69-83. Zimmer, Karl, & Orgun, Orhan (1999), "Turkish", Handbook of the International Phonetic Association: A guide to the use of the International Phonetic Alphabet (PDF), Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 154–158 ELSTAT (Ελληνική Στατιστική Αρχή). 2011. Ανακοίνωση προσωπινών αποτελεσµάτων απογραφής πληθυσµού 2011. Piraeus, 22 July: ELSTAT. http://www.statistics.gr/portal/page/portal/ESYE/BUCKET/General/A1602_S AM01_DT_DC_00_ 2011_01_F_GR.pdf (accessed 17 March 2015). 100 101 APPENDIX RECORDING 1 Speakers: Bahri (22), Sabri (26) Topic: Casual Conversation – Story from Past – Expectations about the future Pomak dialects spoken: Medusa, Pachni Line/ Pomak English Translation Speaker 1/Sabri Kɑk`vɔ `prɑviʃ pu Sele`nik? What are you doing in Thessaloniki? Bahri Nɑ, `peem ɑj`tuvɑ. I am studying here. Beʃin`dʒinu, pet se`ne sɑm The fifth, I am five years ɑj`tuvɑ, `peem. here, studying. 5 `Ɔʃte ɑn`nɑ se`ne sɑ `ɔstɑnɑ, I will stay one more year, tu`gɑvɑ si `vɔrvem nɑx `Ksɑnθi. then I will go back to Xanthi. Sabri Kɑk`vɔ sɑ u`tʃiʃ ? What are you studying? Bahri Nɑ ʒeɔlɔ`ʒi sɑ `utʃem. I am studying Geology. Zɑ `kɑmenje, i `sitʃku `denu `imɑ ɑs About rocks, and everything that has to do 10 dyɲ`øsɑ dɑ `prɑvi. with the Earth. Jæ `iʃtɑ dɑ ti `kɑʒe nɑ jen`nɔ zɑ dɑ sɑ `setiʃ I want to tell you so that you understand it ɑj`sæ `ɔti se ɑj`sæ ni `mɔgɑm dɑ ti vɑfem. in one because now I cannot talk a lot. A`gɑ be`ʃe `mutʃek, ig`ræʃe `jættse ɑs When I was little, I played a lot with 101 102 tʃek`mɑtsi tɑ ɑn`nɔʃ sɑ zɑ`pɑli. lighters and once I lit myself ablaze. 15 A`gɑ be`ʃe `jættse `mutʃek zɑ`pɑli sɑ i When I was very little I lit my self ablaze iz`lezɑx ɑs tʃek`mɑkɑt ɑf rɑ`kɑtɑ nɑ vɔn tɑ and got out with the lighter in the hand and mɑ `fɑtixɑ dve tʃy`lætsi, svɑ`lixɑ mi two men caught me, took off pɑn`tɔlete i `klɑdɑxɑ mɑ fɑf `rækɑnɑ zɑ dɑ, my trousers and put me in the lake so as ɑjne`kɔvɑ… to, like… 20 Tɑ se`dæ je`di ɑj `vɑtre ɑf ɑstɑ`nenɑ, tɑ mɑ So I stayed in the hospital for seven months, `prɑvixɑ ɑmeli`jæt i `sitʃku. so they performed surgery on me and everything. `Vikɑ tʃi `nemɑ dɑ `mɔgɑm dɑ `vɑrvem `ɑmɑ He says that I will not be able to walk but I `vɑrvem. do. Sabri Vɑj… Wow… 25 I her hɑf`tɑ vɑr`væʃe nɑ ɑj`tɑm `ɔti dɑ mi And I went there every week so that they is`kɑrvɑt `ɣipsɔtu ud nu`gine. remove the plaster from the legs. A`mɑ u`pinɑʃe, ud vɑn`nɑʃ sɑs me`sɔtu He pulled, it came off with flesh as one iz`lizɑʃe, `glødɑʃe gu. too, I saw this. Ɔt be`ʃe `mutʃek ni `mɔdʒexɑ dɑ me `prɑvet Because I was little they could not 30 `nɑrkɔsi eee… anaesthetize me eee… 102 103 `Setne ɑ`gɑ iz`lezɑx ud ɑstɑ`nenɑ bu`bɑ Later when I left the hospital dad came and `dɔjde tɑ mi `dɑde `mlɔgu ɔjyn`dʒætsi zɑ dɑ gave me a lot of toys for me to play like like `igrɑm i ɑj`ni. Ajn`vɑ. that. That. Pɑk de`de `vikɑʃe dur ni `idɑm nɑ ɑstɑ`nenɑ But grandpa said until I went to the 35 dɑ mi klɑ`dɑt ud `ʒølvɑ `pikvɑnɑ. hospital, they should apply on me turtle piss Ut `bælunu `ʒønu is`kɑrvɑ, kɑ`tu `præsnu, dɑ From the white that it produces, like milk, gu klɑ`dɑt ɔt ʃe sɑ izgu`i sɑs ɑjn`vɑ. they should put because it will heal with that. Aj`ni `vikɑʃe de`de, i `drugunu `denu u`pinɑt That is what grandpa said, and the other kɑrf, `vðelɑ `ʒønu gu zvɔt. thing they drain blood with, the thing called a leech. 40 Ajne`kɑvɑ `rɑbutɑ eee… `pɔdeʃe dɑ klɑ`deʃe. That kind of thing eee…he was about to put. Ee en`dɑksi, se si gu `pɔmnem zɑ nɑx Eee ok, I will remember this everywhere. `sækɑde. Sabri Me`tʃit kɑ`de `xɔdi ? School, where did you go to? Bahri Me`tʃit ɑf Is`ketʃe u`tide. School, in Xanthi I went. 45 A me`tʃit zɑ, zɑ Ku`rɑnɑ, meh`tep. Sunday school/Quran school in a religious school. Sabri Ne, ne ðimɔti`kɔ. No, no, elementary school. Bahri A, dve se`ne u`tide nɑ, ɑf `mɔjynu `selu Oh, two years I went in my village `Memkɔvɑ, i `drugine fɑf Is`ketʃe `prɔtɔ Memkova/Medusa, and the rest in 103 104 ðimɔti`kɔnu. IskecheXanthi, the first elementary school. 50 Tu`gɑvɑ ɣim`nɑsiɔ, `licɔ, vrit Thereafter, junior and senior highschool, `ektɔ ɣim`nɑsiɔ, `tritɔ `licɔ. everything in the sixth junior highschool and third senior highschool. Vrit be`xɑ kɑ`denu All were where the `kɑʃtɑnɑ, ee ɑj`ni. house was, ee like that. Sabri Fɑf `selu `xɔdiʃli? Do you go to the village? 55 Bahri `Xɔdem kɑk dɑ`ni `vɑrvem. I go, of course I go. Ne, zɑ niʃ`tɔm zɑ dɑ `idɑm dɑ `sedem `ɔʃte. No, I do not want to go there to stay anymore. `Nemɑ `niʃtu zɑ `mene ɑj`tɑm dɑ `prɑvem. There is nothing for me to do there. Tɔ sɑ i tʃy`lætsine ɑj`ni. Men are like that too `Jælnɯs `stɑri us`tɑnɑxɑ. Only elderly are left. 60 `Mlɑdite nɑ`bixɑ. The young left. Jæ si `pɔmnem ɑ`gɑ si bex `mutʃek, I remember when I was little, tɑ i`mæʃe, `sækɑde i`mæʃe ty`tyn. there was, everywhere there was tobacco. Ajnu`gɑvɑ `rɑbutæxɑ vrit ty`tyn. Then everybody worked on tobacco. `Detu iʃ, i`mæʃe `drugunu ty`tyn. Wherever you go, the other had tobacco. 65 Aj`sæ `nemɑ `niʃtu. Now there is nothing. Kut`ri tu `rɑbutet ty`tyn `vikɑt `ɔti `flizɑt Those who work on tobacco say that they 104 105 `vɑtre ɑf pɑ`rine. get in financial loss. `Ɔti zɑ dɑ ku`pɔvɑt i`lætʃvene i vrit `rɑbutine Because in order for them to buy the drugs `flizɑt `vɑtre vɑz pɑ`rise. and everything necessary they get into financial loss. 70 `Nemɑ, vrit nɑ`bivɑt nɑx Alɑ`maɲe, `znɑiʃ ti, There is not, everybody left for Germany, sketɔ istɔ`riɑ. you know, the rest is pure history. Sabri `Lætus kɑ`de `xɔdiʃ ? In the summers where do you go to? `Selu i Is`ketʃe? The village or Iskeche/Xanthi? Bahri Is`ketʃe. Ni `vɑrvem `jættse nɑx `selu. Isketche/Xanthi. I do not go a lot to the village. 75 Aj`sæ, ɑj`svɑ `lætu ʃe sa `nɑbijem nɑx Now, this summer I will depart for Ispɑ`nijɑ fɑf je`din, zɑ jæ`din ɑj pe`ripu. Spain in a month, in about a month. Af je`din ɑj `tʃækɑm `nækvi pɑ`ri dɑ mi In a month I expect some money to be `flezɑt. creditted to me. Sɑ `nɑbiyem nɑx ɑj`tɑm. I will depart for there. 80 Sabri Tɑk`siði ? Journey? Bahri Tɑk`siði ɑm ɑ`ku `nɑjdɑm i `rɑbutɑ, i zɑ A journey but if I find a job, I will stay for `rɑbutɑ sɑ `ɔstɑnɑm. `Nemɑm prɔb`lem. the job too. I do not have a problem. 105 106 `Ɔti mek`tepes ɑj`tuvɑ, yniver`sitesu `nemɑm, Because with the school here, I do not have ni `vɑrvem nɑx `dersene. university, I do not go to the courses. 85 Ni `trævɑ. There is no need. `Jælnɯs `xɔdem nɑ eksetɑsti`kinu dɑ `dɑvɑm. I only go in the exam period to sit for exams. Ajn`vɑ `vikɑm, ʃe sɑ `nɑbijem. That is what I am saying, I will be gone. Kɑk`vɔ ʃe `stɑne ? What else is there going to happen? Sabri Kɑk vɑr`vi me`tʃiten ? How is the school going? 90 Bahri Dve, `ɔniki tɑ`ne ders `imɑm zɑ dɑ Two, twelve courses are left in order to ɑjne`kɔvɑ, tu`gɑvɑ pti`xiɔ. what, then the certificate. `Stɔrix prɑkti`kinu i`ki ɑj, ɑj`sæ `rɑbutem. I did my practice for two months, now I am working. Aj’nvɑ `pɑnɔ `kɑtɔ. That more or less. `Tʃækɑm ɑj`sæ pɑ`ri dɑ mi klɑ`dɔt. I am waiting for them to credit me with some money. 95 Nɑ ri`pɔrtnu `pisɑx `ɔti ud u`dɔl ɑn`di jɑ In the report I wrote beneath that instead `telɔs ɑjne`kɔvɑ `vikɑm, `tʃækɑm pɑ`rine. of end, I am saying, I am waiting for the money. Sabri Nɑ Ispɑ`nijɑ ? U ɑrkɑ`dɑʃe ? In Spain? In friends? Bahri Ne, ɑrkɑ`dɑʃki, `imɑm. No girl friends, I have. 106 107 Du`ʃøli be`xɑ dve se`ne e`vel ɑj`tuvɑ. They had come two years earlier here. 100 Ne i`mæxme utumu`bil tɑ iz`lezɑxɑ sɑs nɑm. We had a car and they came out with us. `Stɑnɑxme `xubɑvɑ pɑ`reɑ. We became a good group of friends. Aj`sæ `tʃækɑt te. Now they are waiting for us. `Vikɑt, kɑk`vɔ tu `stɔrixte ve ɑf They say, what you did in Greece for us, Jynɑnis`tɑnɑt, `sɑɯɔl, i ne `iʃtime dɑ vɑ thank you, us too we want to receive you in 105 `zømime fɑf `vɔrjɑ Ispɑ`nijɑ, Kɑtɑlɔ`niɑ, Northern Spain, Catalonia, ɑj`tɑm. there. Sabri Mjɑ xɑ`rɑ, lætus je `xubɑvu. Very good, in the summer it is good. Bahri `Vikɑt, `imɑme i `kɑʃtɑ i kɑk`vɔtu. They say we have a house and anything. `Nemɑ vi `trævɑ `niʃtu. You will not need anything. 110 `Vikɑt `zømite si pu jen`nɔ `mutʃkɑ `tʃæntɑ i They say, each of you take a small bag and `jelɑte. come. Dɑ, `vikɑm. OK, I say. Aj`ni dɑ se`deme ɑf `kɑʃtɑ, fɑf That way to stay in a house, in a friend’s ɑrkɑ`dɑʃin, `vikɑme dɑ `idim. place, we intend to go. 115 Sabri Hmm, `xubeve. Hmm, good. Kɑk`vɔ sɑ `tʃydiʃ zɑ, jɑ tɔ `melɔn ? What do you think about, for the future? 107 108 Bahri `Tʃækɑm ɑj`sæ dɑ, ni `znɑem. I am waiting now, I do not know. Pɔ `setne `nækvɑ `rɑbutɑ. Later time, a job maybe. `Næʃtu ɑjne`kɑvɑ. Something like that. 120 Nɑ ɑs`ker, ɑjne`kɑvɑ `rɑbutɑ niʃ`tɑm dɑ Military duty, that kind of thing I do not `vɑrvem. want to go to. Hitʃ niʃ`tɑm dɑ `vɑrvem. I do not want at all to go. Hitʃ niʃ`tɑm dɑ `vɑrvem nɑ ɑs`ker. I do not want at all to go for a military duty. `Nækvɑ `rɑbutɑ ɑ`ku `nɑjdɑm. A job if I can find. 125 Pɔ `jættse `vikɑm eksɔteri`kɔ dɑ `ɔstɑnɑm I would rather stay mostly abroad pɑ`rɑ ɑj`tuvɑ. than here. `Iʃtɑm pɔ `jættse zɑ ʒeɔlɔ`ʒi `næʃtu dɑ I want more to find something that has to do `nɑjdɑm. with Geology. Aj`tuvɑ fɑf Jynɑnis`tɑn ɑ`ku ni `stɑne `niʃtu, Here in Greece if something does not 130 `nemɑ dɑ `mɔgɑm dɑ `nɑjdɑm `nikugɑ happen, I will never be able to find a job on `rɑbutɑ ɑs ɑjs`vɑ. it. `Trævɑ dɑ `rɑbutem nɑ `drugi `rɑbuti. I have to do other jobs. Sabri A `iʃtiʃ dɑ us`tɑniʃ nɑ`vɔn? Oh you want to stay abroad? Bahri Sɑ `vidime. We will see. 108 109 135 Ne sɑm gu, ne sɑ sɑm `tʃydil `jættse kvɔ ʃte I have not, I have not thought a lot about je. what it will be. Aj`ne `vikɑm `mɔdʒe dɑ `stɑne. That is what I think it will happen. A`lɑ zɑ pɔ `setne `iʃtɑm dɑ `idɑm nɑx `selu. But for later I want to go to the village. A`gɑ `idɑm kɯrk el`li jɑʃɯn`dɑ `iʃtɑm dɑ si When I reach forty or fifty years I want to 140 `idɑm nɑx `selu dɑ si `klɑdɑm, ɑ`ku go to the village to put, if I have a family `imɑm i ikɔ`ɣeniɑ i det`tsɑ, ni `znɑjem and children, I do not know what to put, kɑk`vɔ dɑ `klɑdɑm, bɑh`tʃene ɑj`tɑm dɑ si in the gardens there is`kɑrvɑm kɑk`vɔtu `sɑdem i dɑ `nɑjdɑm to produce whatever I sow and to find 144 `næʃtu dɑ `prɑvem ɑj`tɑm….`kɑpɔs `etsi. something to do there…something like this. 109 110 APPENDIX RECORDING 2 Speakers: Rahmi (25) & Sabri (26) Topic: Casual Conversation – Routine – Expectations about the future Pomak dialect(s) spoken: Pachni Line/ Pomak English Translation Speaker 1 Sabri Ke ti `lei ? And how are things ? Rahmi Zɑ hɑs`ker ? About the military ? Sabri Pɔs `piɣe nɑ ɑs`ker? How did it go in the military ? Pɔs `pɑi ? How does it go? 5 Rahmi `Xubeve vɑr`vi. It goes well. `Imɑm si i`ki but`ʃyk ɑj. I have two and half more months. Ud birin`dʒitu be `mufkɑ be`læ, `ɔti bexme i Initially it was a bit hard, because we were de`letʃe, ɑj`tɑm Elinɔɑlvɑni`kɑ `sinɔrɑ. far too, there in the Greek-Albanian borders. Jæ `tʃækɑx dɑ si `idɑm nɑx Is`ketʃe zɑ`tɔ, sɑn I expected to go back to Xanthi for that, I 10 zɑ i`ðeɑ mi be`ʃe zɑ`tɔ. had that like an idea. A`lɑ zɑm ɑlɯʃ`tisɑxme. But then we got used to it. Aj`sæ `xubɑvu je. Now it is good. 110 111 `Stɑnvɑme sɑ`bɑlɑhin, i`mæʃe `rɑbutɑ, `imɑ We wake up in the morning, there was work, ɑngɑ`ries. there are chores. 15 Sɑ`bɑlɑhin `stɑnvɑme, je`deme… In the morning we wake up, we dine… `Stɑnvɑme, je`deme, `imɑme ɑngɑ`ries. We wake up, we dine, we have chores. A`gɑ `imɑʃ ipire`siɑ `xɔdiʃ nɑ ipire`siɑnɑ. When you have a service you go to the service. Ud ipire`siɑnɑ pɑk ɑngɑ`ries. After the service again chores. De`mek du i`ki bu`tʃyk ðen `kɑθese, hitʃ ni So till half past two you do not sit, at all 20 se`diʃ. sit. Si`nexiɑ`imɑ `rɑbutɑ. There is constantly work. Sabri Ubi`bægvɑte li dɑ vɑ ni klɑ`dɔt `næknɑ ? Do you evade in order not to be assigned to something? Rahmi Tɔ ni `mɔʒiʃ ɑj`tɑm. You cannot there. Te gu `imɑt nɑ ki`nigɑnɑ. They have it on the paper. 25 Iði`kɑ ɑ`ku si bil i eksɔ`ðuxɔs `drugen den, Especially if you were outside the previous `siɣurɑ `mesɑ. day, for sure you are inside. Sabri Ne, ne, `vikɑm dy`de dɑ iz`lezɑt ipire`siesnu No, no, I am saying till the services come sk`rivɑtelisɑ ? out if you hide? Gø `prɑvite, gø `tsistite, gø ɑjnek`vɔznete… As if you are doing, as if you are cleaning, as if you whatever… 111 112 30 Rahmi Enɔ`ite ne. Of course yes. `Ili `vikɑʃ gø `imɑʃ `rɑbutɑ, druk tɑ je You either say that you have work to do, pu`rykɑl. someone else has called you. A`lɑ ɑjne`kɔs, `xubɑvu je ɑj`sæ. But that, it is good now. Sabri `Kɔlku ste… hɑs`kere pu ɑj`tɑm ? How many are you…soldiers there? 35 `Mlɔzi `ili ?… Many or?... Rahmi Ne si`me `mlɔgu. We are not many. `Imɑ i `mlɔgu ipire`sies zɑ`tɔ je be`læ. There are many services too and that is why it is hard. De`mek je`din iz`lizɑ nɑ So only one goes out per day and de`nøn `ɑmɑ `exume. if we have one. 40 Aj`sæ de`mek du`gɑ bex ne nɑ`bivɑl i`mæʃe So now before I had left there was jen`nɔ nɑ`vɔn. one outside. Sabri Her `kɔlku `dene iz`lizɑte? Every how often do you go outside? Rahmi I`mæx dɑ `izlezɑm jirmii`ki gyn ɑ`lɑ i I had twenty-two days to go outside but tɑ`mɑm. OK. 45 A`gɑ `dɔjdɑt `drugɑnɑ si`rɔ pɔ je When the new series [of conscripts] come 112 113 zɑm `xubɑvu. it is better then. Jɑ `miɑ, kɑm`jɑ vðɔ`mɑðɑ `xubeve mɑs `pɑi. For a, for about a week it goes well for us. `Mexri nɑ `pɑrun `ɔli ɑpɔ`spɑsis. Until everyone gets secondments. Ee `imɑme skɔp`jes, `imɑme pe`ripɔlɑ, Hmm we have watches, we have patrols, 50 `imɑme… we have… Sabri Kɑk je `mæstunu ? Sɑn `xɔrɔs. How is the place? As a location. Rahmi Ne je hitʃ `xubɑvu `ɔti ne je `pɔli. It is not at all good because it is not a city. Zɑ `mene je ɑjn`vɑ simɑndi`kɔ de`mek. So for me that is important. A`gɑ `imɑʃ `eksɔðɔ, `eksɔðɔ dɑ `imɑʃ When you have an exit, exit you should have 55 `xubɑvu `mæstu dɑ iz`leziʃ nɑ ɑjne`kɔvɑ a good place to go out to to something like `næknɑ. that. A`lɑ tɑ`mɑm. But OK. `Imɑ pɑk `pulmi. There are buses again. `Xɔdiʃ mi`si `ɔrɑ ud tɑm nɑ Iɣume`nitsɑ. You go in a half-hour from there to Igoumenitsa. 60 `Xubɑvu je ɑj`tɑm, tɑ`mɑm je. It is good there, it is OK. A`lɑ epi`ði ðen `pernume ek`sɔðus `nemɑme But because we do not get exits we do not `mlɔgu. have many. Sabri Kɑk je, kɑk gu zvɔt `mæstunu kɑ`denu si? How is it, how is it called the place you are in? 113 114 Rahmi Fil`jɑtes. `Ine… `selunu gu zvɔt. Filiates. It is…the village is called. 65 Sabri Kɑk`nɑ `imɑ pu ɑj`tɑm, `kɑk`vɔ je ? What is there around there, how is it? Rahmi `Imɑ, `selu je, `imɑ i `mlɔgu Alvɑ`nɔze `ɔti There is, it is a village, there are many ɑj`tɑm sɑ `sinɔrɑ. Albanians too because there are the borders. Ʒene sɑ primnɑli us`tɑnɑli sɑ pu ɑj`tɑm. Those who have crossed have stayed there. `Imɑme i fɑf hɑsker`jønɑ `mlɔgu ɑjne`kis, We have in the military camp many people 70 trimi`nites. like that too, three-monthers. Ytʃ ɑj sa du`xɑdet, ke ɣeni`kɑ `imɑ i pu They come three months, and generally there `drugi se`lɑ ɑ`lɑ sɑ ɑj`tɑm kɑk, are in other villages too but they are there engɑtesti`meni fɑf ɑjn`vɑ `selu. how, settled in that village. A`lɑ `exune `fiɣi me`tɑ ɑ`pɔ `liɣɔ ɑ`pɔ e`ki, But after a short while they are gone from 75 de`mek. there, then. Lef`kɑðɑ ke `tetjɑ, nis`jɑ ke i ud Lefkada and such, islands and from there ɑj`tɑm `imɑ `mlɔgu epi`ði `vɑzune `vizmɑ jɑ there are many because they use connections nɑ `erθune ke kɑ`lɑ stɔn `tɔpɔ tus ke `ine `ɔli so as to supposedly come to their homeplace e`ki tri`ɣirɔ. and everyone is around there. 80 Sabri `Drugu ɑ`gɑ `svɔrʃi ɑs`ker ti θɑ… What else when you finish the military are… 114 115 Rahmi A`gɑ `svɔrʃem ɑs`ker ʃe si `idɑ nɑx `Atinɑ dɑ When I finish the military I will go back to si, ʃe `iskɑrɑm me`tʃiten. Athens so as to, I will finish my school. Eee…I ʃe `ɔstɑnɑm ɑj`tɑm `kɑksu `glødɑm. Eee… And I will stay there as I see it. Sabri ʃe us`tɑniʃ, `kɔlku ʃe us`tɑniʃ de`mek? You will stay, so how much will you stay? 85 Rahmi ʃe `pɔsede gu`dini, de`mek ʃe `idɑm ɑj`tɑm I will stay for years, so I will go there zɑ dɑ `ʒivɑm pɔ `mlɔgu. to live there mostly. ʃe gu `mɔtʃem zɑ ɑj`ni de`mek, ut hɑs`ker. So I will try, post-military. Sabri `Drugu, kɑk`nɑ, ti `ɑlɔ, kɑk`nɑ ʃe `prɑviʃ pu Other, what, what else, what are you going `Atinɑ? to do in Athens? 90 Rahmi Gɑ…ku `iskɑrɑm me`tʃiten jæ ʃe prɔspɑ`θisɔ When…if I finish the school I will try for i zɑ nɑ`vɔn `næjde `ɔti iði`kɑ, `mɔʒiʃ dɑ abroad too somewhere because especially, `rɑbutiʃ ɑ`pɔ ɑ`pɔstɑsi kɑk`su `imɑ jen`ni you can work from distance like there are `rɑbuti, prɔɣrɑmɑtis`mɔ ke `tetjɑ. some jobs, programming and such. `Prepi `nɑse e`ki sti ðu`ʎɑ de`mek tɔ `minɑ So you have to be there at work once a 95 mjɑ fɔ`rɑ ke `tetjɑ ke sim`feri `pɑrɑ pɔ`li jɑ`ti month and such and it is very much ðe ðez`mevese. advantageous because you are not commited. 115 116 Ni mɔjis, ne si nɑ jen`nɔ `mæstu. You cannot, you are not in one place. Sabri Tɑ`mɑm. OK. Rahmi Eee…ɑj`sæ `xubeve vɑr`vi ɑj`tɑm. Eee…now it is going well there. 100 Iði`kɑ i `ɔti sɑ i hɑ`vɔ sɑ prume`ni, je `lætu, Especially because the weather changed too, ɑj`tɑm je i pɔ `xubɑvu i `lætunu. it is summer, there it is better in the summer. I `Kerkirɑ je `blize. And Corfu is close by. ʃe `iʃtɑm i ɑj`tɑm dɑ `idɑm. I will want to go there too. `Blize si me ɑj`tɑm. We are close by there. 105 `Xubɑvu mi si je. It is good for me still. Sabri `Rɑbutɑ…kɑk`vɑ….prɔɣrɑmɑtiz`mɔ `retʃe fɑf Work…what kind…programming you said eksɔteri`kɔ ? abroad? Rahmi `Ku `mɔʒe, tɔ `kɑknu `vikɑʃe ti, `imɑ If it is possible, it is as you were saying, `zitisi. there is demand. 110 Tɔ `ixɑ ði cɔlɑs. I had seen it too. `Imɑ pu sæ—pu `Internetnu ɑ`gɑ gu There is evr—on the Internet if you are ubi`iskuvɑʃ `imɑ `mlɔgu. looking for there are many. `Iʃtɑt ɑjne`kɑs `rɑbutɑ. They want that kind of work. 116 117 Sabri `Imɑ, `imɑ pɑ`ri. There is, there is money. 115 Rahmi I `værvɑm, tɔ je ɑjne`kɔvɑ, ʃe `nɑjdɑm And I believe, it is that, I will find `næjde. somewhere. Sabri `Imɑ, `iʃtɑt `jættse, `sækɑde `iʃtɑt zɑ There is, they want a lot, everywhere they sxeðiɑz`mɔ istɔse`liðɑs i prɔɣrɑmɑtiz`mɔ. want about web design and programming. Rahmi Xɔ i ɑrkɑ`dɑʃkɑ `ʒøtɑ sɑs `mene be`ʃe, tæ Yes and the girl friend that was with me, she 120 `svɔrʃi, u`tide, `rɑbuti ɑj`sæ fɑf Alɑ`mɑɲe, i graduated, she went, she is working now in ne `tsælɑ `rɑbutɑ, de`mek dørt sɑ`ɑt `rɑbuti i Germany, and not full-time work so she is `plɑtɑsɑ ɑl`tijys ev`rɔ ke i ud `kɔʃtɑnɑ si working four hours and she is paid `rɑbuti zɑ ɑj`nɔs ete`riɑ. six-hundred euros and she works from her home for that company. I ɑj`sæ `xɔdi, is`kɑrvɑ metɑptixiɑ`kɔ i tæ And now she goes, she too is doing a 125 ɑj`tɑm fɑf Alɑ`mɑntski me`tʃit i `rɑbuti nɑ master’s degree there in a German school ɑj`nɔs `rɑbutɑ. and works in that job. De`mek nɑ`sɔr gi `prɑvi. So she does them together. A`lɑ ɑj`tɑm `ɔti sɑ pɔ je `xubɑve But there because the financial situation is ikɔnɔmi`kinu kɑ`tɑstɑsi, pɔ `xubeve vɑr`vøt, better, they fare better, 130 ke sɑs dørt sɑ`ɑt de`mek ɑjn`evɑ ɑl`tɯjyz and so with four hours those six hundred 117 118 ev`rɔ sɑ `jættse `xubeve. euros are very good. Ne ɑj`tuvɑ sɑs se`kis sɑ`ɑt si`me ke ɑn, ɑ`ku Us here are with eight hours gi `zømime. and if, if we get them. Sabri Ni `hesɑbiʃ gu, ni `hesɑbiʃ gu zɑ Is`ketʃe si You do not think, do not think about 135 dɑ si sɑ `vrɑʃtɑʃ ? returning to Xanthi? Zɑ `ʒivɑnje… For living… Rahmi `Nemɑm gu, xɔ. I do not have it, yes. Zɑ `jættse `burʒy stɔ…ɑjn`vɑ, zɑ dɑ `ʒivɑm, For very soon in…that, to live, ne. no. 140 A`lɑ ʃe si du`xɑdem nɑ `kɔlkunu `mɔgɑm `ɔti But I will be returning whenever I can `imɑme i `miʃkunu, `iʃtɑm dɑ gu `glødɑm. because we have the young one too, I want to be seeing it. Sabri `Xɑnø ke `tetjɑ ? Family and such? Rahmi Fɑf `Atinɑ. A`ku sɑ se, ɑ`ku sɑ `lɑxɑ. In Athens. If it, if it happens. Sabri Xɑɑ ɑj`ni, du ɑj`ni gu si nɑ`hesɑbil. Ohh like that, you have thought it that far. 145 `Sitʃkunu fɑf `Atinɑ. Everything in Athens. Rahmi Tɑ`mɑm `mufkɑ `mɔʒe dɑ je pɔ be`læ ɑj`tɑm OK it might be a little bit more difficult 118 119 dɑ `nɑjdime ɑ`lɑ tɑ`mɑm. there to find but OK. Sabri Tɑ`mɑm. OK. Rahmi ʃe `vimme. We will see. 150 Sabri Tɑ`mɑm. OK. Rahmi De`mek ɑ`ku sɑ `lɑxɑ `xubɑvunu, nɯj So if the good thing happens, the best `xubɑvunu zɑ `mene ʃe je, `kɑknu gu sɑm `jæ for me will be, as I have `videl ɑj`tɑm, dɑ `sedem `ɔti mɑ i u`retsnuvɑ seen it, to stay because I also like it very `jættse. much. 155 Sabri `Mɑjkɑti, bu`bɑjkuti, kɑ`nɑ `vikɑt zɑ `ɑjn`vɑ, Your mother, your father, what do they say zɑ `Atinɑ ? about that, about Athens? Rahmi E tɑ`mɑm. Tɔ je `kɑksu ɣɔ`nis, `iʃtɑt si E OK. It is like parents, they want de`tine dɑ si sɑ pɔ `blize. that their kids be closer. A`lɑ, de`mek, `vikɑt mi kɑ`nɑnu jæ `iʃtɑm dɑ But, so, they tell me to do whatever I want to 160 si `stɔrem pɔ `mlɔgu. do for myself mostly. Tɔ i jæ `iʃtɑm ɑj`tus de`mek fɑf Jy`nɑnɑ So I too want here in Greece `ɑmɑ sɑm… fɑf ɑjn`vɑ…kɑk…`nemɑ if I am… in that… how…I will not be solely 119 120 sɑm li pu ɑj`tɑm. there. A`gɑnu `imɑm efke`ries ʃe `xɔdem dɑ gi When I have the chances I will be going to 165 `glødɑm, fisi`kɑ. see them, of course. Nɯj `xubɑvu ɑjn`vɑ ʃe be zɑ `mene de`mek So that would be the best for me for zɑ ut hɑs`keren ɑ`gɑ sɑ `pusnɑm. when I am dismissed from the military. `Metʃit i `rɑbutɑ kɔl—`ku `stɑnvɑ `kɑknu, ʃe School and work as muc—if it is possible gu `stɔrem `nekɑk i ɑ`gɑ `iskɑrɑm me`tʃiten, as, I will do it somehow and if I finish the 170 `rɑbutɑ zɑ ɑj`tɑm i li `ku `nɑjdɑm sɑs pɔ school, work for there or if I find with more `mlɔgu pɑ`ri, pɔ `xubɑvɑ ɑt`mɔsferɑ i kɑk gu money, a better atmosphere and how is it zvɔt, zɑ nɑ`vɔn, ʃe `idɑ nɑ`vɔn. called, for abroad, I will go abroad. I nɑ`vɔn `nemɑ dɑ `sedem de`mek zɑ fse. So even for abroad I will not stay for ever. ʃe sɑ `vɔrnɑm ɑ`lɑ ku sɑ de`mek pɑ`rine I will return but if the money is good then I 175 `xubeve ʃe `idɑ zɑ pɑ`ri pɔ `mlɔgu. will go mostly for the money. `Ili zɑm ut kumbj`yterɑn ku iði`kɑ jen`nɔ Or then from the computer if I especially ɑjne`kɑs `rɑbutɑ ku `nɑjdɑm ud de`letʃe dɑ find one such work from distance to work `rɑbutiʃ, `xubɑvu ʃe be`ʃe. on, it would be good. Sabri `Drugu… Other… 180 Rahmi Dɑ ni se`diʃ nɑ jen`nɔ `mæstu. So that you do not stay in one place. 120 121 Sabri E. kɑ`nɑ `vikɑ. What does E. say? Rahmi `Xubeve je, `xubeve je. He is fine, he is fine. Very fine, `Jættse `xubeve, `svɔrʃyvɑ i me`tʃiten, `fɑtil je also finishing the school, has found `rɑbutɑ. a job. 185 Zɑm, hɑsker`likɑn zø ɑnɑvɔ`li. For the military he got a delay. ʃe si `ide tu `xrɔnu nɔ`mizɔ, ni `znɑjem He will go next year I think, I do not know ku`gɑ. when. Sabri `Jeʃte si `tʃætkɑ tɔ si ? He is still dancing? Rahmi Hmm. Tɔ je… Tɔ `ixɑ…Nɑ`sɔr bex`me Hmm. He is… I had it… We had gone 190 utiʃ`lili sɑn `hɔbi de`mek ɑ`lɑ `ine ɔ`reɔ, together as a hobby then but it is good, ektɔ`nɔnese, de`mek, is`kɑrvɑʃ si ud `vɔtre you relieve yourself, you expell your energy e`nerɣiɑ. from within. Sabri E. kɑk gu `hesɑbi? How does E. think things? `Dumili li ste hitʃ ? Have you spoken at all? 195 Rahmi Tɔ ɑj`tɑm ʃe se`di i to, kɑksu de`mek, He will stay there, so as, when we were ku`gɑtu se `dumexme ne ɑjnu`gɑs, ud talking then, since then there is a lot of time 121 122 ɑjnu`gɑs `imɑ dɑ sɑ zbe`reme `kɔlku. since we have not seen each other. Ud lɑ`ni ? Since last year? Ut ku`gɑ be`ʃe ? Ni `pɔmnem. Since when was it? I do not remember. 200 Ud lɑ`ni ? Ud prɔtɔxrɔ`ɲɑ ? Since last year? Since New Year’s Day? Sɔvɑ`rɑ ɑj`si dɑ `dumime zɑ jɑ sx`eðjɑ. To seriously talk like this about plans. Sabri Tɔ je zɑgu`ben. He is lost. Tɔ i tɔ ni du`hɑde `jættse. He too does not come a lot. Tɔ ni `rɑtʃi sɑs nɑm. He does not want with us. 205 Rahmi Tɔ mu je `xubɑvu ɑj`tɑm... He finds it good there… Ne dɑ ni `rɑtʃi. It is not that he does not want. Sabri Ni `rɑtʃi sɑs ne A`tinɑlɯje. He does not want with non-Athenians. Rahmi I tɔj sɑ se je `fɑtilu pu ɑj`tɑm. He too has become caught up there. Se`di pu ɑj`tɑm. He stays there. 210 Sabri `Setɑm sɑ. I understand. Rahmi `Xubɑvu mu je pu ɑj`tɑm. He finds it good there. Sabri Kɑk, kɑk ti sɑ `zglævɑ Sele`nik ? How, how do you see Thessaloniki? 122 123 Rahmi I Sele`nik je `xubɑvu `jættse. Thessaloniki too is very good. `Jættse mɑ u`retsnɑ. I liked it very much. 215 Sabri Kɑk pri`kɑrɑ ? How did things go for you? Rahmi A`lɑ `ɔti sɑm pɑk ʒy`vɑl pɔ `mlɔgu, But because I have lived more, gu`dini fɑf `Atinɑ, mi si je pɔ fɑf `Atinɑ. years in Athens, it is more in Athens. Sele`nik, de`mek, je `jættse `kɑmɑtnu So, Thessaloniki, is very beautiful a kɑsɑ`bɔ. city. 220 In`sɑnɑs sɑ `xubɑvi, sɑs `pɔrvu `ɔku kɑksu gu The people are good, at first glance as we `vikɑme. say. Sabri Pɔ ne, pɔ ne tehlike`li ud `Atinɑ. Not more, less dangerous than Athens. Rahmi Xɔ. `Siɣurɑ. Yes. Of course. Ne je dɑ tɑ zɑ`pirɑ. It is not something to impede you. 225 Ne je li pɔ ne tehlike`li, ɑm je i ɑjne`kɔvɑ, It is not only less dangerous, but also that, kɑk gu zvɔt, gɑ vɑr`viʃ fpɔt ðen, how is it called, as you walk on the street, `xubɑvu, nis `xubɑvi mæs`tɑ pri`minɑʃ. good, you walk through good places. `Nemɑʃ ɑjn`ɔvɑ, ɑjn`vɑk his ud `vɔtre gø ʃe ti You do not have that, that feeling from iz`leze `næknɑ. within that something will appear. 123 124 230 `Nemɑʃ de`mek ɑjne`kɑvɑ. So you do not have such. Sabri Anisi`xiɑ. Worry. Rahmi Anisi`xiɑ. Worry. Sabri `Drugu ? Pɔs, kɑk pri`kɑrɑ fɑf Sele`nik ɑj`ses What else? How, how did you pass these `dene ? days in Thessaloniki? 235 Rahmi `Xubeve. Good. `Dɔjdɑx, `dɔjdɑx… I came, I came… `Dɔjdɑx, ku`gɑ be`ʃe ? I came, when was it? Pɔ nɑ `drugɑtɑ hɑf`tɔ. The previous week. Ne `drugɑtɑ, pɔ `drugɑtɑ. Not last, the previous. 240 I ɑj`sæ, iz`lezɑhme nɑ`vɔn, klɑb. And now, we went out, to a club. Ɣe`mɑtes `meres de`mek, `pɔlni. So full days, full. `Xubeve pri`kɑrɑxme. We passed these days well. Sabri Aɑ tɔ `xɑrikes de`mek ? Ohh so you enjoyed it? Rahmi Xɔ, `xubɑvu be `jættse. Yes, it was very good. 245 Zɑ`tɔ ʃe ti `dɔjdɑm pɑk. Aj`sæ… That is why I will come again. Now… 124 125 Sabri Ðe vɑ`reθikes `nækvu ? You did not get any bored? Rahmi Aj`sæ ʃe mɑ `imɑʃ ɑj`tus. Now you are going to have me here. Sabri Tɑ`mɑm. OK. Jæ, `mene mi je `drɑgu dɑ `imɑm myse`fire. I, I like to have guests. 250 Rahmi ʃe gu `stɔrem, `kɑθe fɔ`rɑ ku`gɑnu `premnɑm I will arrange it, every time when I pass for zɑ `næjde, nɑx `Atinɑ li `pɔdɑm nɑx ɑjn`vɑ, somewhere, to Athens if I am going or that, nis Sele`nik, jen`nɔ `stɑsi ɑj`tus. through Thessaloniki, a stop here. Sabri Dɑ `dɔjdite i sɑs E. You should come with E. too. I `nemu `vikɑm ɑ`lɑ te dugu`dinɑ ʃe `dɔjdɑt I tell him too but they will come again next 255 pɑk. year. Pɑk ʃe `imɑ…. Again there will be… Rahmi Tɔ ɑj`sæ `ɔti sɑ je se `fɑtil `tɔj i sɑs `rɑbutɑ i Because he is caught up with work and the sɑs me`tʃiten tɑ ʃe, ʃe mu je pɔ zɔr zɑ dɑ school that it will, it will be more difficult `dɔjde. for him to come. 260 `Ade jɑ, zɑ `nækvu Sɑvɑtɔ`kiriɑkɔ `mɔnɔ. Maybe for, for some weekend only. 125 126 Sabri Tɔ `vikɑʃe `mɑlku `derse mu sɑ i `nemu He was saying that he has few courses us`tɑnɑli fɑf `Atinɑ. left in Athens. `Prɑvisi i tɔ ɑj`sæ… He is doing his… Rahmi Aj`sæ prɑkti`ki `prɑvi. His practice. 265 Sabri Erɣɑ`siɑnɑ, `prɑvi. Tin ðiplɔmɑti`ki. The paper, he is doing. His thesis. Rahmi `Xubɑvu je. It is good. Sabri Pu `selu kɑk`vɔ be pu de`nese? How was it these days in the village? Rahmi `Fselu `nemɑ in`sɑn. There are no people in the village. Nɯj `mlɔgunu sɑ `ili nɑ `rɑbutɑ, `ili nɑ Most are either at work, in schools, now they 270 me`tʃite, ɑj`sæ `dɑvɑt i ekse`tɑsis. are also taking exams. Kɑk…vɑre`tɑ. How…boring. Ne je `xubɑvu. It is not good. Ni u`retsnuvɑmɑ `fselu. I do not like it in the village. Sabri Kɑ`de `xɔdi pu `selu ? Where did you go in the village? 275 Rahmi U`nɑm. U`bɑbɑ. In our home. In my grandmother’s. `Vide `bɑbɑ. I saw grandma. 126 127 Af`tɔ ud `xubɑvine `rɑbuti fɑf `selunu. That from the good things in the village. Fɑf `selu `xɔdiʃ zɑ dɑ `vidiʃ ti `ʒene in`sɑn si You go to the village to see those people pɔ ɑjne`kɔs… ɑjn`vɑ. more like… that. 280 I zɑm tɔ, kɑ`denu fse `xɔmme, u E., fɑf And then, where we always go, to E.’s, dy`cɑnɑn, sɑs `xubɑvine `pesne. in the café, with the good songs. Sabri I`mæ li in`sɑn pu dy`cɑnɑn hitʃ `i li… ? Were there any people in the café at all…? Rahmi `Nemɑ `mlɔgu, `nemɑ. There are not many, there are not. A`lɑ ɑj`sæ ud me`tʃites ɑ`gɑ `svɔrʃet But now when the exams from the schools 285 ekse`tɑsis su ʃe sɑ nɑ`pɔlni pɑk. finish it will fill up again. ʃe si `dɔjdɑt i `ʒene sɑ nɑ`vɔn pu `rɑbutɑ, pu Those who are abroad in works, in Germany, Ɣermɑ`niɑ, pu nɑfpi`ɣietɑnɑ. in shipyards will return. A`lɑ ɑj`sæ `nemɑ de`mek `mlɔgu, ɑj`sɔvɑ So, but now there are not many, this 289 pe`riɔðɔ. period. 127 128 APPENDIX RECORDING 3 Speakers: Salih (56) & Sabri (26) Topic: Receipe for Baking Bread Pomak dialect(s) spoken: Pachni Line/ Pɔmɑk English Trɑnslɑtiɔn Speaker 1 Sabri `Kɑʒi mi sindɑ`ɣitu zɑ `xlæbɑn tvɔj `kɑknu Tell me the receipe for your bread as you gu nɑ`gɑdɑʃ, pu tɔ peti`xenis pɔ `xubeve i ud do it, that you succeed in doing it better `ɑnne. than mom. Salih Jæ si `imɑm jen`nɔ `mɔje sindɑ`ɣi i pɔ I have a receipe that is my own and most of 5 `mlɔʒiʃnu, `jættse `rættʃiʃ dɑ mi sɑ ni pugu`di the time, very rarely for it to not turn out `kɑknu gu `prɑvem. good as I do it. Kɑk gu `prɑvem? How do I do it? Dve `kilu, dve `kilu ptʃe`nitʃenu `brɑʃnu, Two kilos, two kilos wheat flour, plu`vinɑ `kilu, ne plu`vinɑ `kilu, tʃej`rek, bir half a kilo, no not half a kilo, a quarter, one 10 bu`tʃyk `kilu ptʃe`nitʃenu `brɑʃnu i ɑ`ʃɑ and a half kilos wheat flour and more or less jukɑ`rɯ plu`vinɑ `kilu `rɔʒænu `brɑʃnu. half a kilo rye flour. `Zømɑm gu ɑjn`vɑ fɑf jen`nɔ ku`pɑne gu I take that and pour it in a `sipem. bowl. 128 129 `Sipem jen`nɔ lɑ`ʒitsɑ `pɔlnɑ sɔl i ne `xubeve I pour a spoon full of salt and another not 15 `pɔlnɑ pɑk ʃi`ker. completely full with sugar. `Sipem mɑ`jø dve ke`sinki i `fɑtem `suxu I pour yeast two sachets and I start to bake it du`gɑ si je tɑ gu `bɔrkɑm. while it is still dry. `Bɔrkɑm gu dɑ `ide `sækɑde dɑ `imɑ `ɑjni I bake it so that it goes everywhere so that it `renk ɑ`gɑ sɑ ispe`tʃe `ɔti ɑ`gɑ sɑ has the same colour when it is baked because 20 `mesi `ɔlum ni `stɑnvɑ `xubeve. when it is only baked it does not turn out good. `Zɑfɑtem dɑ gu sɑs `tɔplɑ `vɔdɑ tu`gɑvɑ, ne I start then with warm water, pɑr`livɑ, `tɔplɑ, ne ni stud`enɑ, jen`nɔ not hot, warm, not cold either, a kɑ`nɑtɑ `vɔdɑ. jug of water. Dve `kilu jæ ɑ`ʃɑ jukɑ`rɯ ɑjn`vɑ i `zɑfɑtɑm Two kilos it is more or less that and I start 25 je`vɑʃ je`vɑʃ tɑ `sipvɑm i `mesem. slowly slowly to pour and bake. `Sipvɑm i `mesem, `sipvɑm i mesem. I pour and I bake, I pour and I bake. `Mesem sɑs dve se `rɔki. I bake with both hands. `Kɔlku nu `mɔgɑm gu rɑs`tikvɑm ras nɑx As much as I can I push it to `krɑjjenu zɑm ut krɑj pɑk. the sides and over again. 30 Fɑf sre`de ku`pɑnenɑ gu `bɔrkɑm, gu I bake it in the center of the bowl, I massage `mɑtʃkɑm, gu `mesem. it, I bake it. Ajnu`gɑvɑ `sipem i dve lɑ`ʒitse hɑs zej`tin, Then I pour two spoons true oil, 129 130 pɑr`θenɔ ele`ɔlɑdɔ `ʒøsu `vikɑme i pɑk what we call virgin oil and again `zɑfɑtem tɑ gu `bɔrkɑm. I start to bake it. 35 `Bɔrkɑm gu `jeʃte ɔn dekɑ`kɑ ɑ`ʃɑ jukɑ`rɯ i I bake it for another ten minutes more or less `ɔstɑvem gu `mɑlku dɑ pu`tʃine, beʃ-ɑl`tɯ and I let it rest a bit, five-six minutes dekɑ`kɑ zɑm gu `iskɑrɑm tu`gɑvɑ gu then I take it out then `klɑdɑm nɑ krɔk. I put it on a wooden plank. Krɔk `znɑiʃ kɑk`nɑ je. You know what that wooden plank is. 40 Jen`nɔ `ɔvɑlestɑ `dɔskɑ gu`læmɑ, nɑ`preʃ sɑ An oval-shaped big wooden plank, in the ne i`mæli. past they did not have that. Ajn`vɑ je ut nɑ`preʃ us`tɑnɑtu ɑ`lɑ That is left from earlier but it jeee -- vɔli`kɔ `jættse. is – very handy. `Klɑdɑm gu nɑ `negɑ, nɑbrɑ`ʃnivenu je I put it on it, that is powdered 45 nɑp`reʃ ɑjn`vɑ. first. `Klɑdɑm vrit tes`tɔnu nɑ `negɑ. I put the whole dough on it, `Zɑfɑtem tu`gɑs ɑj`tɑm tɑ gu pri`brɑʃtɑm tɑ I start then there and flip it gu `mɑtʃkɑm, tɑ gu `mesem, tɑ gu and massage it, and I bake it, and ɑjtek`vɔznem i `stɔrem gu. I do other things and I do it. 50 `Ɔtdelem gu nɑ tri, `ɔti ɑjn`vɑ ʃe `stɑne tri I separate it in three, because that will `kilu `xlæp. become three kilos of bread. 130 131 Nɑ tri gu `rɑzdelem, `xubɑvi ɑj`ni `fɔrmes zɑ I separate it in three, in beautiful forms like dɑ `stɑne. that so that it becomes. Bun`nɔʃ gu `prɑvem i ɑt`ʃɯk fɑf tep`tsønɑ nɑ Sometimes I do it open in a plate, again in 55 tri pɑk ɑ`lɑ bez dɑ gu `klɑvɑm nɑ `fɔrmi. three but without putting it in forms. `Kɑknu gu `stɔrem `xubɑvu `stɑnvɑ. As I do it, it becomes good. `Ɔstɑvem gu dɑ `ftɑsvɑ. I let it become ready. Aɑ ɑ`gɑ pu`tʃine, `nɑʒegɑm `frɯnɑn nɑ el`li Hmm when it rests, I heat the oven in fifty dere`dʒe, `klɑdɑm gu fɑf fɯ`rɯnɑn tɑ puse`di degrees, I put it in the oven and it stays for 60 ɔn dekɑ`kɑ, tʃej`rek, ud ɔn du tʃej`rek pe`ripu ten minutes, a quarter, from ten to a quarter `ɔti `vɔtre sɯdʒɑk`lɯkɑn fɑf udɑ`jønɑ `mɔʒe approximately because inside the room the ɑ`nɑlɔɣɑ de`mek. temperature may depend that is. `Mɔʒe dɑ je `bilu pɔ `mɑlku pɔ `mlɔgu. It may have been higher or lower. I ud ɑjn`vɑ epire`ɑzete, tɑ ɑj`ni By that too it is affected and like that it stays 65 tʃej`rek se se`di fɑf `frɯnɑn tɑ `ftɑsɑ. for a quarter in the oven to become ready. A`gɑ `ftɑsɑ `xubeve, `izvɑdem gu, `klɑdɑm When it is becomes ready well, I take it out, `frɯnɑn nɑ i`kijyz dere`dʒe pɑk i `metnɑm I put it in the oven in two hundred degrees gu. and I drop it in. A`gɑ sɑ izgɑ`si `lɑmbinkɑnɑ `metnɑm gu When the small light switches off I drop it in 70 tu`gɑvɑ fɑf fɯ`rɯnɑn zɑ `tsælu bir sɑ`ɑt. the oven for a full one hour. `Tsælu bir sɑ`ɑt se`di fɑf fɯ`rɯnɑn nɑ A full hour it stays in the oven in two 131 132 i`kijyuz dere`dʒe. hundred degrees. A`gɑ sɑ mi`ne bir nu sɑ`ɑt, ɑjnu`gɑvɑ gu When the one hour passes, `iskɑrɑm, `klɑdɑm gu nɑ `dɔskɑnɑ, nɑ then I take it out, I put it on the plank, on 75 `pɑngɔnu i `zømɑm sɑs stu`denɑ the surface and I start with cold `vɔdɑ, sɑs jen`nɔ tu`lumbinkɑ tɑ gu water, with a small sprinkler to spray it `nɑpɑrskɑm ut vɑr`xu ku`rɔnɑ `xubeve. well on the top of its crust. Zɑm sɑs jen`nɔ `plɑtnu ɑj`si de`belu, Then with a fabric this thick, hɑv`lɯje `mɔʒe dɑ je ɑjn`vɑ de`belɑ `xubɑvɑ. that can be a good thick towel. 80 `Fɑtem tɑ gu `pɔkrijem i – i gu, `ɔstɑvem gu I get to cover it and – and I, I let beʃ-ɑl`tɯ dekɑ`kɑ i `glødɑm ut vɑr`xu kɑk it five six minutes and look from the top how je, kɑk`nɑ je, ku je `møku ni `sipvɑm `jeʃte, it is, what it is, if it is soft I do not pour ni `pɔrskɑm gu `jeʃte. more, I do not spray it more. Ku je ne, `ɔtkrijem gu pɑk `bɔrʒy `bɔrʒy gu If it is not, I uncover it again quickly quickly 85 `nɑpɑrskɑm, pɑk si gu `pɔkriyem. I spray it, again I cover it. `Ɔti gu puk`rivɑm? Why do I cover it? Nɑ min eksɑt`mizete ɑ`pɔtɔmɑ tɔ ne`rɔ, So that the water doesnot evaporate abruptly, dɑ si gu dɑr`ʒi ɑj`tɑm. so that it holds it there. `Ɔti gu ɑj`ni `prɑvem? Why do I do it like that? 90 Zɑ ku`rɔnɑ dɑ mu je `møkɑ du`gɑ dɑ sɑ So that its crust is soft until the bread 132 133 ize`de `xlæbɑn. is eaten. `Mɔʒe dɑ `trævɑ pɑk, i ytʃyn`dʒy It might need again, a third time se`fer dɑ gu `nɑpɑrskɑm. to spray it. Pɑk gu `stɔrem ɑjn`vɑ. Again I do that. 95 `Ɔstɑvem gu, `kɔlkunu se`di se`di. I let it, as much as it stays it stays. `Xubɑvu je jer`ɯm sɑ`ɑt dɑ se`di ɑj`tɑm. It is good fot it to stay there for half an hour. Ud`mɑxnɑm gu tu`gɑvɑ i `kɔmuʃte dɑ sɑm I take it out then and whosoever I may have `dɑvɑl ud ɑjn`vɑk xlæp, vrit mi gu given from that bread, everybody likes it been`disvɑt i `iʃtɑt mi sindɑ`ɣinu. and they want from me the receipe. 100 Kɑk `stɑnvɑ dɑ mi `kɑʒem. To tell them how it is done. `Dɑvɑl sɑm `mlɔzim. I have given to many people. `Memnun sɑ. They are satisfied. Jen`ni gu sɑ pɑk ne `mɔgli dɑ gu `stɔret. Some though have not been able to do it. `Vikɑt ti `imɑʃ i `drugu `nækvu misti`kɔ tɑ gu They say you have something more of a 105 ni `kɑzvɑʃ. secret that you do not tell. `Nemɑ `drugu misti`kɔ. There are not more secrets. Ajn`vɑ je. That is it. Aj`sæ `imɑ i fɑf `mesenjenu. Now, there is also the baking. Kut`rɔ kɑk gu `mesi, jæ gu Who and how they bake, I bake it 133 134 110 `mesem bɑ`jæ. quite a bit. Jæ ti `kɑzɑx, `ɔstɑvem gu tɑ pu`tʃinvɑ. I told you, I let it rest. `Mɔʒe dɑ gu `ɔstɑvem dvɑʃ dɑ pu`tʃine. I may let it twice to rest. Pɑk gu `mesem, pri`brɑʃtɑm gu, Again I bake it, I flip it, `prɑvem gu, i `mɔtʃem `kɔlkunu `mɔgɑm sɑs I do it, and I try as much as I can to give 115 rɑ`kise dɑ mu dɑm `xubɑf, `xubɑvu `sximɑ. it with my hands good, a good shape. `Zbirɑm mu `krɑjjenu dɑ ni se`di dɑ I collect its corners so that it does not stay rɑsʃiru`tʃɑevɑ nɑx strɑ`nine. and spread towards the sides. Pɔ dɑ vɑr`vi nɑ`gɔre, dɑ `zøme `xubɑvu For it to mostly go upwards, to get a good `sximɑ. shape. 120 Ajn`vɑ je. That is it. `Jættse `xubɑf `stɑnvɑ. It becomes very good. Ajn`vɑ je se kɑrɯ`ʃɯk sɑs `rɔʒenu ɑ`lɑ That is a mixed one with rye but I do `prɑvem i biz `rɔʒenu. without rye too. A`gɑ ʃe `prɑvem biz `rɔʒenu, If I will do without rye, as much as I have 125 `kɔlkunu sɑm klɑl `rɔʒenu, `jeʃte ɑj`nɔlkus ʃe put rye, I will pour that much more in wheat mu `sipem ptʃe`nitʃenu i pɑk `iðiɑ i flour and again the same ðiɑðikɑ`siɑ. process. Kɑk`nɑnu sɑm `prɑvil ɑj`tɑm, pɑk si gu Whatever I have been doing there, I am 134 135 `prɑvem. doing it again. 130 Xɑ ɑ`gɑnu je ne fɑf `fɔrmi, nɑbrɑʃ`nivvɑm gu Oh when it is not in shapes, I powder the ut vɑr`xu `xlæbɑn zɑ dɑ se`di `kɑmɑtnu ɑjni. bread from the top so that it stays beautiful that way. `Stɔri tu`gɑs je`din renk `xubɑf ne ni tʃer`ven It makes for a good colour neither red ne ni bæl. nor white. `Kɑmɑtnu jen`nɔ—je`din renk. A beautiful – a colour. 135 Ajn`vɑ je. That is it. Ne je gu`læmɑ `rɑbutɑ ɑ`lɑ `iʃte me`rɑk. It is not a big deal but it requires interest. Sabri Ut kɑ`de sɑ si nɑu`tʃil ? Where have you learnt? Salih Ut kɑ`de sɑ nɑu`tʃix ? Where did I learn? Ud `internetnu sɑm `vidvɑl jen`ni sindɑ`ɣes, I have seen some receipes on the internet, 140 `kɑzvɑli mi sɑ i `drugi, i pu `selu si, i and others have told me, and in the village, fɯrɯn`dʒije `drugi mi sɑ `kɑzvɑli, ɑ`lɑ i jæ and other bakers have been telling me, but ut me`rɑk, `vikɑm jæ ʃe pɑk ɑj`si dɑ si gu me too from interest, and I say that I will do `stɔrem. it this way. Tɔ ku `klɑvɑ plu`vinɑ lɑ`ʒitsɑ ʃi`ker i`li ku ni If he adds half a spoon sugar or if he does 145 `klɑvɑ ʃiker, jen`nɔ mi je re`kɔl ʃi`ker dɑ ni not add sugar, one has told me not to pour 135 136 `sipvɑm i jæ mu `sipvɑm i ʃi`ker. sugar and I pour it sugar too. `Drugunu mi je re`kɔl plu`vinɑ lɑ`ʒitsɑ. The other has told me half a spoon. Jæ sɑm dejne`disvɑl `tsælɑ sɑm `klɑvɑl, I have tried and have added a full one, dejne`disvɑl sɑm ne sɑm `klɑvɑl hitʃ i `exɔ I have tried not adding at all and I have 150 `ɣini ɣefsi`ɣnɔstis kɑ`tɑ `kɑpjɔ `trɔpɔ i become a connoiseur in same way `glødɑm tʃi `ɔti ɑj`nɔs sindɑ`ɣi `ekɑtse. and I see that that receipe sat well. Nɑj je `xubɑvɑ tæ. That it is the best one. Nɑj gu been`disvɑt `negɑ. They prefer that one. 154 Aj`nɔlkus. That much. 136 137 APPENDIX RECORDING 4 Speakers: Mehmet (22) & Sabri (26) Topic: Casual conversation – Routine – Plans/Expectations about the future Pomak dialects spoken: Kotili, Pachni Line/ Pɔmɑk English Trɑnslɑtiɔn Speaker 1 Sabri Kɑ`nɑ ʃe `prɑviʃ ɑjs`vɑ `lætu ? What will you do this summer ? Mehmet `Lætu? Summer? ʃe `idɑ nɑh Pɔlɔ`niɑ `kɑktu `rekɑh `pɔrve. I will go to Poland as I said earlier. Ex `xubɑvɔ je. Eh it is good. 5 `Klɑdɑxme jen`nɔ `mesɔn `imɑm jen`nɔ We used a connection, I have a ɑrkɑ`dɑʃkɑ. girl friend. Dɑ `idime je`di ki`ʃi nɑx vrit si ɑrkɑ`dɑʃe, For seven persons for all to go to friends, `sitʃku si sɑs plɑ`tenu. everything paid. `Xubɑvɔ je dɑ `idime ɑj`sæ `mufkɑ dɑ sɑ It is good to go now a little to displace 10 rɑs`tɔpime, dɑ `vidime Pɔlɔ`niɑ. ourselves, to see Poland. `Dʒæbɑ stin teli`ki. Free at the end of the day. `Xubɑvɔ ɑj`si je. It is good this way. Zɑm i `iʃtɑm dɑ pɔ `utʃem. Then I want to study. 137 138 Sep`temvri dɑ `premnɑm `dersevene, dɑ sɔm To pass the courses in September, to be 15 pɔ re`hɑt `ɔti `imɑm jen`nɔ `vɑrɔs re pe`ði more relaxed because I have a burden, mu, zɔr ɑj`sæk. this difficulty. Aj`zi. This. `Drugɔ `næknɔ, `ɔti prɔ`kipsi. Anything else, whatever comes up. Sabri `Drugu? Kɑk`nɑ sɑ `tʃydiʃ zɑ, jɑ tɔ `melɔn ? Other? What do you think for, for the future? 20 Mehmet Jɑ tɔ `melɔn? For the future? Je `iʃtɑm dɑ `zɑvɑrʃem ut me`tʃitese. I want to finish from the school. Dɑ `zɑvɑrʃem ud ɑsker`likese zɑm i… To finish from the military service then and.. `Iʃtɑm dɑ `idɑm zɑ dve-tri gɔ`dini nɑ I want to go for two-three years to Alɑ`mɑɲe dɑ is`kɑrɑme `nækvɔ `frɑnkɑ `etsi Germany to earn some money this way 25 nɑ, dɑ `imɑme nɑ krɑj. to, to have in a corner. Zɑm i ʃe si `dɔjdɑm nɑ Jynɑni`stɑnɑ dɑ Then I will return to Greece to see how the `videm kɑk vɑr`vi `rɑbutɑsɑ `ɑmɑ ɑ`kɔ mi ne thing goes but if it does not sit `legne, `iʃtɔm dɑ `idɑm se mjɑ `ɑkiri `xɔrɑ. with me, I want to go to a random country. Dɑ `zɑfɑtem ɔt krɑj. To start anew. 30 Sabri Dɑ nɑ`biiʃ? To go away? Mehmet Xɔ. I Alɑ`mɑɲe niʃ`tɔm, ɑj`sɑi, nɑfpi`ɣiɑ jɑ Yes. I do not want Germany too, this, 138 139 pɔ`li, ɑ`lɑ zɑ dve tri gɔ`dinɯ zɑ dɑ `imɑm shipyards for a lot, for two three years so as me`tɑ ti `ðinɑmi re pe`ði mu. we have the power [my child]. Aj`si dɑ `imɑm pɑ`rɯne nɑ ipɔsti`riksɔ tɔn This way to have the money to support 35 eɑf`tɔ mu. myself. I zɑm i `nækvɔ ɣnɔs`tɔzi `nækɑk ɑj`sɯj dɑ And then some connection too, this way to `idɑm nɑ `nækvɔ `nɔvɔ hyky`mete ɑj`si i go to a new country like this and dɑ `videm knɔ `mɔʒem dɑ `stɔrem ɑj`tɑm. to see what I can do there. Dɑ `imɑm pɑ`rɯne `ɔste ke nɑ ɑpɔ`tixɔ dɑ To have the money so as even if I fail, to 40 `rekɔm re pe`ði mu, en`dɑksi. say, OK. Sɑ dejne`disɑh i ɑjn`vɑ `stɑnɑ. I tried myself and that happened. Sabri Dɑ si `imɑʃ je`din des`tek ut pɑ`ri. To have a monetary assistance. Zɑ `rɑbutɑ kɑk`vɔ sɑ `tʃydiʃ ? What do you think about work? Mehmet Zɑ `rɑbutɑ ? About work? 45 Dy`de dɑ `flezɑm nɑ me`tʃitese `vikɑʃe Until I got in the school I used to say øøretmen`like. teaching. Aj`sæ, zɑm hitʃ mɑ ni ɔ`pinɑ. Now, then it does not attract me at all. Hitʃ niʃ`tɔm ɑj`sæ. I do not want at all now. `Mɔʒe pɑk dɑ mi si `dɔjde `ɑmɑ niʃ`tɔm. It may come back to me but I do not want. 139 140 50 `Iʃtɑm pjɔ pɔ`li `kɑti pjɔ ðrɑsti`kɔ re pe`ði I want more something more effective mu. [my child]. Aj`si, `næknɑ dɑ sɑ urɑʃ`tisɑm, dɑ `idɑm Like this, something to occupy myself, to go `ite se turiz`mɔ ɑj`si, `isɔs ke me`tɑfrɑsi ɑ`lɑ either to tourism like this, maybe translation `kɑti pjɔ enðjɑ`ferɔn. but something more interesting. 55 Ne znɔm. I do not know. Sabri Ne ti je `drɑgu… You do not like… Mehmet Ne u`pinɑmɑ dɑ `idɑm ut`preʃ `deti dɑ mi It does not attract me to go in front of `rekɔm `stɔrite ɑj`zi, `stɔrite ɑj`zi, `stɔrite children to tell them do like this, do like this, ɑj`ni. do like that. 60 Jæ ne znɔm. I do not know. `Amɑ tɔ ðɔki`mɑsɔ bɔ`ri dɑ sɑ `premenem If I try I may change ɑj`sæ ɑ`lɑ… now but… Aj`sæ nɑ ɑ`kɯlɑse mi je `nækvɔ `drugɑkvɔ. Now on my mind is some other thing. Ap`lɑ nɑ xrisimɔpi`isɔ ti `ɣl`ɔsɑ jɑ `kɑti. Simply to use the language for something. 65 Sabri Zɑ `selu kɑk sɑ `tʃydiʃ ? How do you think about the village? Mehmet Zɑ `selɔ, `selɔ `ɔmræ. About the village, the village died. 140 141 Tɔ `nemɑ `næknɑ. There is not anything. Sabri Aɑ ʃe nɑ `bivɑʃ ut `selu? Ohh you will leave from the village? Mehmet Je sɑm `zɑten ne `fselɔ. I already am not in the village. 70 Je sɑm fɑf Is`ketʃe. I am in Xanthi. Jæ sɑm ne `fselu. I am not in the village. Sabri `Tʃydiʃ sɑ zɑ gu`læmi kɑsɑ`bi ? Are you thinking of large cities? Mehmet A`mɑ ɔn gɔ`dinɔ sɔm re fis`ketʃe. But I already am ten years in Xanthi. Ne ɑj`nɔlkus gɔ`lemɔ ɑm jen`nɑ kɑsɑ`bɔ. Not that big but a city. 75 `Fselɔ, `fnɑʃenɔ `selɔ, ni znɔm `vɑʃenɔ kɑk In the village, in our village, I do not know je, ɑ`lɑ `nɑʃenɔ `selɔ ɑj`sæ kɔ `idiʃ, kɑk tu how yours is, but our village now if you go, um`rætu. it is like dead. `Nemɑ ni in`sɑnɑ ni `mlɑdɯ, `jɑlnɯz There are neither people nor young, only `stɑrɯ, `ʒɔni i `deti `imɑ. old, women and children there are. 80 `Drugɯne, `ɔpjɔs spu`ðɑzi spu`ðɑzi, `kjɔpjɔs The rest, the one who studies studies, and the ðe spu`ðɑzi vrit sɔ nɑ`vɔn nɑ Alɑ`mɑɲe, nɑ one who does not,are all abroad in Germany, `rɑbutɑ. for work. `Nemɑ `nikɑkvɔ. There is nothing 141 142 `Nikɑkvɔ ni us`tɑnɑ. There is nothing left. 85 Jen`nɔ kɑhve`nø `imɑme `jælnɯs. We only have one café. Sabri `Kɔlku `imɑ in`sɑn? How many people are there? Mehmet Ne znɔm `kɔlku `imɑ in`sɑnɑ ɑ`mɑ ne I do not know how many people there are `mlɔgu. but not many. Aj`sæ `jættse `mɑlku. Now very few. 90 Jen`nɔ kɑhve`nø `imɑme `jælnɯz. We have only one café. Kɔ`gɑnɔ `xɔdem, ex…nɑ `mɔise gɔ`dini Whenever I go, eh… people my age— `ʒen—ne `jælnɯz nɑ `mɔise gɔ`dini, sti ði`cɑ not only those my age, children of my mu ɣe`ɲɑ `deti dɑ sɔ `zbirɑme mɑks jir`mi, i generation when we get together we are at tɔ ɑjrɯl`disvɑme sɑ. max twenty, and we separate. 95 Ɔ kɑ`θenɑs `ɔti ɣus`tɑri ɑj`sæ. Everyone whatever they like now. A`mɑ `nemɑ `fselu hɑs. But there really is not in the village. `Kɔgɑʃte dɑ pɑ`pɯtɑʃ, `jættse um`rætu. Whosoever you ask, very dead. Sabri `Lætus? Kɑ`de gu, kɑ`de gu pri`kɑrvɑʃ ? The summer? Where,where do you spend it? Fɑf Is`ketʃe `ili `selu? In Xanthi or in the village? 100 Mehmet Fis`ketʃe. In Xanthi. 142 143 `Tsælɔ `lætɔ ɑ`ku `idɑm dve tri `dene nɑ The whole summer only two three days if I `selɔ. go to the village. Fɑf Is`ketʃe sɔm. I am in Xanthi. Sabri Bɑj`ræmve? The Eid celebrations? 105 Mehmet Fɑf `selɔ `nɯje, i `fɑsi `ine, `her bɑj`ræm Us in the village, the thing is, every Eid sɑm `fselɔ jæ. celebration I am in the village. Ap`lɑ `fselɔ `nɯje, `kɔʃtɑnɑ, ɔn gɔ`dini gɔ ni Simply us in the village, the house, we have vɑ`lesɑvɑme. not been looking after for ten years. `Mɑlku je `ɔti `nɑne. It is in a bit of a state. 110 `Nemɑme ni tile`ɔrɑsi, ni `internet, `niknɔ. We have neither TV, nor internet, nothing. Epɔ`menɔs, ku`gɑnu `xɔdem, jæ `nemɑm So, when I go there, I have nothing `nikɑnɑ dɑ `prɑvem pu nɑm zɑm `prizɔ `liɣɔ to do there then I nag a bit tus `filus ke tɑ li`pɑ, dɑ izle`zeme, dɑ the friends etc, to go out, to `stɔrime. do. 115 Ut`to ne mi je rɑ`hɑt. That is why it is not comfortable for me. E`nɔ fis`ketʃe tɑ `exɔ `ɔlɑ. Whilst in Xanthi I have everything. Sabri E ɑj`ni je. Well, that is it. Tɔ i ne `nemɑme `internet. Us too do not have internet. 143 144 Mehmet Ne `jɑlnɯs `internet. Not only internet. 120 `Jen`nɔ tile`ɔrɑsi dɑ `imɑʃ `bɑre `næknɑ dɑ To have a single TV at least something to `glødɑʃ. watch. Aj`sæ `nemɔm `nikɑknɑ, kɑ`tɑlɑves? Now I have nothing, did you understand? Sabri Tɔ i dɑ `imɑʃ i dɑ `nemɑʃ tɔ `nemɑ `neknɑ dɑ Whether you have or you do not there is `glødɑʃ kɑk`vɔsu kɑ`nɑlvese… nothing to watch as the channels are… 125 `Drugu kɑk`nɑ tɑ u`retsnuvɑ dɑ `prɑviʃ ? What else do you like to do? Kɑk`nɑ tɑ u`retsnuvɑ dɑ `prɑviʃ, `hɔbi… What do you like to do, as a hobby… Mehmet E `tɔpɑ mɑ`resi ɑj`sæ dɑ `igrɔm. Well now I like to play football. Me`tɑ…ɑj`sæ pri ɑj`ʃæm `dɔjdɑm `mɑlku dɑ Afterwards…now close to the evening I sɑ nɑ`puʃtɔm `ɔti `imɑm jen`nɔ `fɔrmɑ dɑ come a little and run because I have a 130 nɑ`bije. tracksuit that needs to go. Eh…Jæ pɔ `mlɔgu `sedem u`nɑmi. Eh…I mostly stay in my place. Ud ɑj`ʃæm dɑ `izlezɑm, ni `prɑvem `næknɑ, I may go out in the evening, I do not do ðilɑ`ði tɔ tre`lɔ. anything that is to say crazy. Kɑθis`jɔ, i ud ɑj`ʃæm sɑs ɑrkɑ`dɑʃævene, Sitting, and in the evening with friends, 135 `nækvɑ `vɔltɔ, `nækvɑ kɑh`vø. some strolls, some coffee. 144 145 Sabri Kɑk`vɑ sxɔ`li be ti? What school were you in? Mehmet Ingi`lizdʒe øøretme`ni. English teacher. Nɑ Pu`mɑtsku kɑk je ne znɔm. I do not know how it is in Pomak. Angli`ki filɔlɔ`ɣiɑ. English Philology. 140 Sabri U`retsnuvɑlitɑ ? Do you like it? Mehmet E ? Eh? Sabri U`retsnuvɑlitɑ ? Do you like it? Mehmet Aj`nɑi ? That? `Prɔti fɔ`rɑ tɔ ɑ`kuɔ. I hear it for the first time. 145 Sabri Sɑ`resi ? Do you like it? Mehmet `Xubɑvɔ je, ɑ`mɑ jæ `trævɑʃe `mɑlku… It is good, but I needed to have a bit… Ad birin`dʒi gɔ`dinɑ `xubeve, `xubeve From the first year we went well, u`tidɑxme, ɑ`lɑ ikin`dʒi gɔ`dinɑ, `trævɑʃe well, but the second year, I should not dɑ gɔ ni `ɔstavem ɑj`si `mlɔgu. have let it this much. 150 Aj`sæ tʃim gu u`stɑvix, ni`mɔʒem `nitu dɑ gu Now that I let it, I cannot get it 145 146 `zberɑm. together. Sabri Eh ʃe gu zbe`reʃ. Eh you will get it together. Tɔ `iʃte `mɑlku, `mɑlku dɑ `sønniʃ. It just needs a bit, a bit of sitting down. Mehmet `Iʃtɑm, `iʃtɑm `mɑlku. I want, I want a bit. 155 `Iʃtɑm ɑd beʃin`dʒi nu gɔ`dinɑ dɑ gu I want to get it together from the fifth `zberɑm. year. Niʃ`tɔm hitʃ dɑ `idɑm nɑ ɑltɯn`dʒi gɔ`dinɑ. I do not want at all to go into a sixth year. Ɔt`tɔ, hem ɑj`sæ hem fɑf Sep`temvriɔ… That is why, both now and in September… Sabri I dɑ `idiʃ fɑf ɑltɯn`dʒi gu`dinɑ pɑk je ne Even if you go to a sixth year it is not 160 `mlɔgu. much. Tɑ`mɑm je. It is OK. Mehmet Tɑ`mɑm je ɑ`mɑ pɑk… It is OK but again… Jɑ tɑ `sxeðjɑ pu `exɔ re pe`ði mu, `trævɑ dɑ For the plans that I have [my child], I need `zɑvɑrʃem du ɑltɯn`dʒi gɔ`dinɑ `ɔt ne to finish till the sixth year because we also 165 `imɑme i ɑsker`likɑse. have the military service. Tɔ mɑ dɑr`ʒi jen`nɔ gɔ`dinɑ nɑd`tzɑt. It keeps us a year back. `Skepsi teli`ki re pe`ði mu, beʃin`dʒi gɔ`dinɑ A final thought [my child], when I finish the 146 147 ku`gɑnu `zɑvɑrʃem dɑ `imɑm dve tri `derse, fifth year to have two three courses, `tʃetri, `ɔste nɑ ɑsker`likɑne… four, so that in the military service… 170 Ɔd vɑn`nɔʃ sɑs ɑsker`likɑne dɑ `mɔʒem dɑ At once with the military service to be able gɯ dɑm. to sit for them. `Seti li sɑ? Did you understand? Ðilɑði ɑltɯn`dʒinu gɔ`dinɑ… That is to say the sixth year… Sabri Zɑ dɑ `zimɑʃ `ɑdje. So that you get leaves of absence. 175 Mehmet Ne zɑ `ɑdje. Not for leaves of absence. Ap`lɑ ɑltɯn`dʒinu gɔ`dinɑ dɑ sɑm is`kɑrɑl Simply the sixth year to have finished both hem me`tʃitese hem ɑsker`likene. the school and the military service. Nɑ ksemper`ðepsɔ me ɑf`tɑ tɑ `ðiɔ. To do away with those two. Sabri Kɑ`li `fɑsi. Good thing. 180 `Xubeve gu si is`hesɑbil. You have thought it well. Mehmet Ut`tɔ, ut`tɔ. That is why, that is why. Sabri Kɑ`nɑ iʃ`tæx `drugu dɑ tɑ `pɔpitɑm ? What else did I want to ask you? A…pu, pu `Kɔzludʒe `næli `imɑ… ? Oh…in, in Kotili is not there a…? `Znɑiʃli je`din øret`menin, S. ? Do you know a teacher, S.? 147 148 185 Mehmet S. `hɔdʒɑ ? Teacher S. ? Sabri Xɔ. S. `hɔdʒɑ. Yes. Teacher S. Mehmet Nɑ ðimɔti`kɔ. In the elementary school. Sabri Xɔ, xɔ. Yes, yes. Tɔ je `mene tɑ`rɑf. He is a relative of mine. 190 `Miʒy mi je. He is an uncle to me. Mehmet Aɑ ? Ohh? Sabri Xɔ. Yes. Mehmet `Arɑ M., `kɔpelenɔ mu… So M., his boy… Sabri Xɔ, M. mi je `ksɑðerfɔs. Yes, M. is a cousin of mine. 195 Mehmet Znɔm ɑy`nɔgɑ. I know him. Tɔ be i tɔ `hɔdʒe `mɔne. He too was a teacher to me. Sabri Tɔ be… Kɑ`nɑ be? He was…What was he? Ðiefθind`is be pu ɑjn`vɑ? Was he a headmaster in that? 148 149 Mehmet My`dyr? A principal? 200 Ne znɔm, `mɔʒe dɑ je `stɑnɑl ut `setne ɑ`mɑ I do not know, he might have become later jæ ku`gɑtu be, ɑjtu`gɑs be duʃ`lɔlɔ tɔ, nɑ but when I was, he had just arrived, in my `mɔjite gɔ`dini. years. E le ɑjnu`gɑs. Well just then. Sabri Tɔ je ɑj`sæ ɑjne`kɔznu, faf, my`dyr fɑf He is now that, in, a principal in 205 Is`ketʃe, fɑf je`din me`tʃit. Xanthi, in a school. Mehmet Xɑɑ ? Ohh? Sabri Xɔ. Yes. Mehmet `Ade jɑ. `Jættse `xubeve. Good. Very good. Sabri Bu`bɑjkuti, `mɑjkɑti, kɑk`vɔ `prɑvet ? Your father, your mother, what do they do? 210 Mehmet Ee…`nije dɑ ti `kɑʒem… Ehh… us let me tell you… Sabri Kɑk`vɔ `rɑbutɑ `prɑvet? What kind of work do they do? Mehmet Nɑ`preʃ `krizete, ɑj`sæ ɑl`tɯ je`di gɔ`dini Before the crisis, now six seven years 149 150 nɑ`preʃ, vrit si `bæhme fɑf Is`ketʃe `xubeve before, we were all in Xanthi well like ɑj`si, i bu`bɑ be ikɔ`ðɔmɔs. this, and dad was a builder. 215 `Abi is`kɑrɑ dve tri, dve me`tʃiteve ɑ`lɑ ðe My older brother finished two three, two `bɔrese nɑ vri re pe`ði mu pu ɑj`tɑm `rɑbɔtɔ. schools but he could not find a job there. I tɔ zɑm `kɑknu bu`bɑjku ikɔ`ðɔmɔs ke ɑf`tɑ. He too then like dad a builder and such. `Abi `sækɑkvɔ `rɑbɔtɔ vɑsi`kɑ `prɑvi. My older brother basically does any work. Ɔt kɑhve`ne je pri`minɑl. He has been through cafés. 220 Ðe fɔ`vɑte `tipɔtɑ. He is not scared of anything. Zɑm i ud`ri `krizet. Then the crisis hit. Bu`bɑ e`ki pu `imɑstɑn vrit si `xubeve, tɔn Dad when we were all well, he got `ðjɔxnune. sacked. Zɑm bu`bɑ nɑ Alɑ`mɑɲe u`tide. Then dad went to Germany. 225 Aj`sæ `imɑ beʃ gɔ`dinɯ pu Alɑ`mɑɲe je. Now it is five years that he is in Germany. `Imɑ sxe`ðɔn jen`nɔ gɔ`dinɔ zø i `ɑbi je pri There is almost a year since he took my `tɔgɑ. older brother with him. E ke `tɔrɑ `exume `spɑsi ɣeni`kɑ re pe`ði mu. Well now we are broken generally. `Abi, bu`bɑ pu Alɑ`mɑɲe, ɑnne sɑ`mɑ My older brother, dad in Germany, mom 230 fis`ketʃe, jæ sɑm ɑj`tus. alone in Xanthi, I am here. Sabri `Kɔlku `brɑtje si`te? How many brothers are you? 150 151 Mehmet Jæ i `ɑbi. Me and my older brother. Beʃ gɔ`dini ðjɑfɔ`rɑ. Five years difference. Dvɑ`minɑ, `drugu ne. Two brothers, others no. 235 Sabri `Drugu, `ɑbiti, kɑk`vɔ je? What else, your brother, what is he? U`ʒenen je ? Is he married? Mehmet Knɔ ? What? Sabri Pɑndre`menɔs ? Married? Mehmet Aɑ…Jirmiɑl`tɯ gɔ`dini je. Ohh…He is twenty six years old. 240 Ne je ɔ`ʒɔnenɔ. He is not married. `Nemɑ `nitɔ `tetjɔ, `nitu `mɔmɑ ɑj`sæ He does not have even that, even a girlfriend zɑ`kɑtʃenɑ. now attached. Jæ ne znɔm. I do not know. `Mɑlku je, ne budɑ`lævu, kɑksu jæ je… He is a bit, not crazy, he is like me… 245 epilekti`kɔs. selective. Sabri Xɑ, xɑ, e tɔ si`me vrit. I see, I see, well all of us are. 151 152 Mehmet I `miɑ tu ksi`nizi i `ɑli ðe `kserɔ ti. The one is sour the other is I do not know. `Ajni `kɑksu jæ. Just like me. `Trævɑ dɑ `nɑjdɑm i jæ `jættse, `iʃtɑm je… I also need to find a lot, I want her… 250 Tɔ `iʃte `mlɔgu. He wansts a lot. `Sini `ɔtʃi? `Sini `ɔtʃi. Blue eyes? Blue eyes. `Iʃtɑm ɑjnu`zi ? Ajnu`zi. I want that? That. Ne, `trævɑ dɑ je `kɑknu `iʃtime. Us, she has to be as we want her. Sabri Tɔ sɑ vrit in`sɑnɑs ɑj`si. All people are like this. 255 Tɔ si me ne li, ne ste li ve `jɑlnɯs. It is not only us, you are not the only ones. Mehmet Zɑm bu`bɑ i `ɑnne li gu ig`rɔt. Then dad and mom keep joking with him. Dø vre `nɑjdi `mɔmɑ, jirmiɑl`tɯ re fpræ, dø, Find a girl, you reached twenty six dø… ! ,…! A`lɑ zɑ `mɔne jirmiɑl`tɯ je ne `niknɔ re. But for me twenty six is nothing. 260 Ɔd ɔ`tuz nɑ`tɑtɑk ɑ`mɑ `trævɔ dɑ gɔ `mɑlkɔ From thirty and on he needs though to chase `firi `ɔti… it a bit… Sabri Aj`ni je… It is like that… Ne dɑ sɔ ɔ`ʒɔni ɑm dɑ si `imɑ mɔ`mɔnɑ be Not to get married but to have a girl at 152 153 jæu. least. 265 Ɔt ɑ`ku ne nɑʃ pu `selɔ ti `znɔiʃ, tɔ ɑ`ku ne Because if you do not find in the village you `nɑjdiʃ du ɔt`tuz`beʃ zɑm i `nemɑ dɑ `nɑjdiʃ i know, if you do not find till thirty five then `nikugɑ zɑm je pɑ`rɑtiku zɑ `tebe. you will never find too then it is bad for you. `Nemɑ dɑ `imɑʃ `nækvu dɑ tɔ vɑ`lesɑvɑ, nɑ You will not have someone to take care of mi`rɑsi ti zɔ`i. you, to share the life. 270 Mɔnɑ`ksjɑ. Loneliness. Tɔ `iʃte dɑ sɔ ɔ`ʒɔni ɑ`mɑ ne mɔ`ʒi dɑ `nɑjde He wants to get married but he cannot find `gɔmenɑ. a girlfriend. Sabri Dɑ ɑm tɔ si je `miʃek `jeʃte, tɔ si je tɑ`mɑm Well he is still young, he is OK se ili`kiɑ. age-wise. 275 Mehmet `Miʃku si je vre ɑm dɑ si `nɑjde `mɑlku i tɔ He is young but he should find a bit so that mu dɑ mu si je pɔ `drɑgu. he is a bit happy too. Sabri Aj`ni je. It is like that. Tɑ`mɑm je. It is OK. Mehmet A`lɑ i tɔ gu hitʃ ni `firi pɑk, mɑ`lɑkɑs. But he does not chase it at all, the idiot. 153 154 280 Sabri Pu Sele`nik kɑ`nɑ `prɑviʃ ? In Thessaloniki, what are you doing? Kɑ`de `xɔdiʃ ? Where do you go? Mehmet Pu Sele`nik, `sækɑde. In Thessaloniki, everywhere. `Ɔti `tixi. Whatever happens. ʃe `izlezɑm ud ɑj`ʃæm, ʃe `idɑm `nɑx I will go out in the evening, I will go 285 ɑrkɑ`dɑʃinɑ `kɔʃtɑ, ʃe puse`dime ɑj`tɑm. to a friend’s house, we will hang out there. ʃe sɑ zbe`rɔt i `drugi, ʃe izle`zeme nɑ`vɔn, Others will gather as well, we will go out, `nækvu `birɑ, `nækvu zɑ kɑh`vø i knɔnu some beer, for some coffee and whatever izle`ze. comes out. `Nækɑk dɑ sɑ fɑr`ni `nækvɑ i`ðeɑ ke e`mis If an idea gets thrown somehow and we 290 ɑkɔlu`θume. follow. `Nemɑ. There is not. Sabri Pu kɑ`de se`diʃ ? Where do you stay? `Fkɔʃtɑ `ili fes`tiɑ ? In a house or a student dormitory? Mehmet Fɑf es`tiɑsɑ ɑj`tus `sedem. I stay in this student dormitory. 295 Tis `vitɑ. The B ones. `Amɑ vrit ɑrkɑ`dɑʃene sxe`ðɔn `imɑt `kɔʃtɑ. But almost all the friends have a house. 154 155 Ɔt`tɔ `xɔdime `fkɔʃtɑ. That is why we go to a house. Aj`si… Puse`dime `mufku ɑj`tɑm. This way…We hang out a bit there. `Xubeve je. It is good. 300 Sabri Arkɑ`dɑʃe ut `selu, `selunu `imɑli ? Are there friends from village, from the village ? Mehmet Ut `selu `nemɑm hitʃ. I do not have any from the village. `Jælnɯz, ut `selunu ɑj`tuz ɑ`gɑ sɑm li jæ. Only me, from the village it seems it is. Ud `mɔjise ɑj`sæ ɑrkɑ`dɑʃe, ɑp tus mik`rus. From my friends now, from the young ones. Sabri Ut `tvɔjen sɯnɯf ne sɑ pri`minɑli `drugi ? None other from your class has passed? 305 Mehmet Vrit si`me A`tinɑ. We are all in Athens. Sabri A xɑ, `jælnɯz si ti ɑj`tus. Ohh I see, only you are here. Mehmet Kɑtɑ gɑ sɑm li jæ ɑj`tus. It seems that it is only me here. Sabri `Xɔdvɑl li si nɑx `Atinɑ ti ? Have you been to Athens? Mehmet I `mɔjenɑ, `miɑ ksɑ`ðerfi. And my, a girl cousin of mine. 310 A`mɑ ut `kɔpelɯ, hitʃ. But from boys, none. Sabri `Xɔdvɑl li si nɑx `Atinɑ dɑ gi u`bidiʃ? Have you been to Athens to visit them? 155 156 Mehmet Nɑ ? In? Sabri Nɑx `Atinɑ. In Athens. Mehmet `Xɑtim ? A religious celebration? 315 Sabri Nɑx `Atinɑ, `Atinɑ. In Athens, Athens. Mehmet Aɑ…Ee…Ne. Ohh…Ehh…No. Ne, `vikɑm dɑ ne ɔt sɑ vrit uti`ʃli nɑx ɑj`tɑm No, I said maybe because all have gone there tɑ dɑ ne dɑ si uti`ʃøl jen`nɔ gez`mø. that maybe you went for a trip. E vrit `idɑt, u`tʃøt ɑj`tɑmi, ɑj`sæ `ɑmɑ `jættse Eh all go, they learn there, but now I really 320 `iʃtɑm. want. Tri gɔ`dini li mi `vikɑm ʃe `dɔjdɑm, ʃe For three years I have been telling them I `dɔjdɑm. will come, I will come. `Nikɑk ni mu`ʒi dɑ `idɑm. I could not go at all. Sabri Tɔ i jæ ɑrkɑ`dɑʃe i`mæh ɑ`gɑtu beh And I too I had friends when I was 325 birin`dʒi… first… Tɑ `prɔtɑ `xrɔniɑ gø dɑ `xɔdem, gø dɑ The first years I intended to go, I intended to 156 157 `xɔdem. go. Hitʃ sɑ ni `lɑxɑ. It did not happen at all. Mehmet I jæ `jættse iʃ`tæx, `nikɔgɑ ni mu`ʒi. I too wanted much, I never could. 330 Ɔt jæ `imɑm ke tin ksɑ`ðerfi mu e`ki ðilɑ`ði Because I also have my girl cousin there ðen… that is to say I will not… Pɑk `imɑm `mlɔgu ɑrkɑ`dɑʃe pu bɔ`run nɑ Though I have many friends that can host me filɔkse`nisun e`ki. me there. Me tin ksɑ`ðerfi mu `imɑste `jættse `bliski With my girl cousin we are very 335 re pe`ði mu. close. `Jættse mi jɔ… To me she is very… `Xubɑvɔ je ɑj`tɑm ɑj`sæ dɑ sɑ… It is good now there to… Al kɑtɑ`gɑ ɑj`sæ zɑ`vɔrʃevɑm nɑ gɔ`dinɑ. But I probably finish/graduate now in a year. Teli`kɑ `nemɑ dɑ `mɔʒem dɑ `idɑm. In the end I will not be able to go. 340 E `iʃtɑm `ɑmɑ dɑ `idɑm. Eh but I want to go though. `Imɑm i `mlɔgu `xubɑvi ɑrkɑ`dɑʃe zɑm sɑ I have a lot of good friends and I `smilɔvɔm. miss them. Dɑ `idɑm dɑ mɑ rɑs`tɔpet pu ɑj`tɑm. To go and be shown the places there. 344 Sabri Xɑ, kɑl`ɔs. Hmm, good. 157 158 158 159 APPENDIX RECORDING 5 Speakers: Suat (22) & Sabri (26) Topic: Casual Conversation – Routine – Plans/Expectations about the future Pomak dialects spoken: Mandena, Pachni Line/ Pomak English Translation Speaker 1 Sabri Ut kɑ`desi? Where are you from? Suat Ad `Bɑsɑjkɔvɔ. From Mandena. Sabri Kɑde je ɑjn`vɑ ? Kɑk`vɔ je ? `Selu je ? Where is that? What is it? A village? Suat `Selu je. Kje je `Zminsi ? It is a village. Where is Sminthi? 5 Pɑ`minɑʃ `Zminsi nɑ `gɔre, kɑ`enu `imɑ You pass by Sminthi upwards, where there is ðiɑ`stɑvrɔsi nɑ ʃɑ`jin, nɑ Ketel`nik, `imɑ i nɑ a crossroads to Ehinos, to Kentavros, there is Je`søren. also to Oraion. Nɑm je pɔ `bliskɔ. For us it is closer. Nɑm je Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ pɔ `bliskɔ nɑ Je`søren. For us Mandena is closer to Oraion. 10 Vɑr`viʃ nɑ ɑriste`rɑ zɑm nɑ ɑl`tɯ xili`ɔmetrɑ You go to the left then in six kilometers ɑd ðiɑ`stɑvrɔsinu, zɑm `vɔri `nɑʃynu `selu. from the crossroads, then go to our village. Sabri `Kɔlku in`sɑn `imɑ? How many people does it have? 159 160 Suat Jyz hɑ`ne si me. We are a hundred fanilies. Sabri Xɑ ? Jyz hɑ`ne. What? A hundred families. 15 Eeee… pu ɑj`tɑm se`diʃ `ili pu Is`ketʃe ? Eeee… you stay there or in Xanthi? Suat `Hɑjɯr nɑ `Bɑsɑjkɔvɔ `sedem, pu `selɔ. No, I stay in Mandena, in the village. Sabri Ðimɔti`kɔ ? Elementary school? Metʃit kɑ`de `xɔdi ? Where did you go to school? Suat Ðimɔti`kɔ `beʃɔ nɑ `Bɑsɑjkɔvɔ si, nɑ `mitʃkɔ Elementary school I was in the one in 20 me`tʃite. Mandena, in a small school. `Nemɑ, `nemɑ ɑj`tui `mlɔgɔ `deti. There is not, there are not here many children. Eeee…zɔm `setno `sleze nɑ `Isketʃe E…then I decended to Xanthi, went ɣim`nɑsjɔ `licɔ vɑr`væʃɔ. to junior and senior highschool. Sabri A`xɑ ne fɑf Du`lɑphɑn… Oh not in Sminthi… 25 Suat Ne ne…Nɑ ` Isketʃe `ɔti iʃ`tæʃɔ, bu`bɑjkɔ No no…In Xanthi because my father wanted, `iʃ`tæʃɔ pɔ `xubeve nɑ Is`ketʃe `ɔti `vikɑ tɔj my father wanted better in Xanthi because he nɑ Du`lɑphɑn, ne je `xubeve nɑ `Zminsi. says that in Sminthi, it is not good in Sminthi. 160 161 Ne gɔ `vikɑme nɑ `Zminsi. We call it in Sminthi. Zɑ pɔ `xubeve dɑ `nɑutʃe, dɑ sɑ `nɑutʃe For me to learn, to learn better I descended 30 `sleze nɑ Is`ketʃe. to Xanthi. Sabri Fku`trɔ `xɔdi? In which did you go to? Suat Ɣim`nɑsjɔ `beʃe nɑ miɔnɔti`kɔ nu i Junior highschool I was in the minority one `licɔ nɑ `tritɔ nu, nɑ `nɔvɔ nu. and senior highschool in the third, the new one. Sabri Kɑ`nɑ sɑ, kɑ`nɑ sɑ u`tʃiʃ ? What are you, what are you studying? 35 Suat Aj`tui sɑ `utʃe fisikɔθerɑ`piɑ. Here I am studying physiotherapy. Sabri Fɑf ku`trɔ `ktiriɔ si ? In which building are you? Suat `Mɔne me`tʃiten je nɑ `Sinðɔ. My school is in Sindos. Znɔʃ kɑ`e je `Sinðɔ ? You know where it is Sindos? Iz`vɔn `selɔnɔ li du gɑ si ne `vlɑzel nɑ `selɔnɔ On the outside of the village just before you 40 je me`tʃiten du`xɔde. enter into the village my school is located. Sabri Kɑk vɑr`vi ? How is it going? 161 162 Suat `Xubeve vɑr`vi ɑj`sæ. It is going well now. Zɑ bir se`ne ʃe `dɔvɑrʃe kɑk sɔ gu `glødɑm. In a year I will finish as I see it. Sabri Kɑk gu `hesɑbiʃ zɑ ud, ud ɑj`tɑm nɑ `tɑtɑk? How do you think it after, after that point? 45 Kɑk`vɔ ʃe `prɑviʃ? What are you going to do? Suat Eeee kɔ`gɑ nɔ `dɔvɑrʃem me`tʃiten `imɑ se Eeee when I finish the school there is also ɑj`tui i ɑsker`likɑ. here military service. ʃe si `izlezɑ ɑsker`lik. I will complete my military service. Dɑ si `izlezɑ ɑsker`likɑ, `mɔʒe dɑ `pɔrɑbɔtem I should complete my military duty, I may 50 `mifkɔ ɑj`tui nɑ Is`ketʃse `ili nɑ, pɑ ɑj`tui nɑ work here in Xanthi a little bit or in, here in Jy`nɑnɑse. Greece. `Setne zɑm `iʃtɔ, `nemɑ ne `iʃtɔ dɑ `sede Later I want, I do not want to stay ɑj`tui. here. `Iʃtɔ dɑ `idɑ nɑ`ɔn `ili nɑ Alɑ`mɑɲe `ili nɑ I want to go abroad either Germany or 55 Tyr`kije `ɔti `iʃtɔ dɑ `stɔre metɑptixiɑ`kɔ stɔn Turkey because I want to do a master’s ɑθlitiz`mɔ i, i `tui ne znɔm ɑ`ku `imɑ dɑ degree in sports, and here I do not know if `stɔre metɑptixiɑ`kɔ stɔn ɑθlitiz`mɔ. there is for me to do a master’s degree in sports. Nɑ`ɔn `imɑ `siɣurɑ. Abroad there certainly is. `Iʃtɔ dɑ sɔ `fɑte zam nɑ jen`nɔ `xubɑvɔ I want to hold on to a good 162 163 60 `rɑbɑtɔ dɑ `vlezɔ nɑ jen`nɔ ɔ`mɑðɑ dɑ `rɑbɑtɔ job to enter in a team to work nɑ… in… Sabri Nɑ `tvɔjen mes`lek? In your profession? Suat …tɔ `ɔnirɔ mu xɔ. … my dream, yes. Sabri Tɔ `trævɑ dɑ `imɑ metɑptixi`kɔ nɑ te`fɑɑ nu There must exist a master’s programme in 65 ɑj`tus stɔn ɑθlitiz`mɔ. the physical education here on sports. Suat Ne znɔm, ne sɔ rɑs`pɯtɑl ɑ`mɑ… I do not know, I have not asked but… Sabri Tɔ ni `trævɑ dɑ si `svɔrʃil There is no need for you to have finished the te`fɑɑ zɑ dɑ idiʃ fɑf physical education school in order to go to metɑptixi`kɔ. a master’s programme. 70 Suat `Mɔʒiʃ `sækɑde. You can everywhere. Suat Xɔ jæ znɔ. Yes I know. `Dɑvɑʃ kɑtɑtɑk`tiries zɑ dɑ `vleziʃ. You sit for entry exams in order to get in. Sabri Xɔ. Ekse--. Xɔ kɑtɑtɑk`tiries ekse`tɑsis zɑ dɑ Yes. Exa--. Yes entry exams in order to get `fleziʃ fɑf metɑptixiɑ`kɔ nu. in the master’s programme. 163 164 75 A`lɑ ne sɔ rɑs`pɯtɑl i ɑj`tui ɑ`ku `imɑ i But I have not asked here if there is or is not `nemɑ `ɔti `iʃtɔ pɔ `mlɔgu dɑ `idɔ nɑ ɔn. because I want mostly to go abroad. Ne `iʃtɔ ɑj`tui dɑ `stɔrem, dɑ `prɑvem. I do not want to do it here, to be doing it. Sabri `Mɑjkɑti, bu`bɑjkuti kɑk`vɔ `prɑvet ? Your mother, your father what are they doing? Suat Bu`bɑ ? Bu`bɑ `beʃɔ ku`gɑtu be`ʃe `jeʃte nɑ Dad? Dad was when I was even in senior 80 `licɔtu ku`gɑtu be`ʃe jæ, nɑ Is`ketʃe `rɑbuteʃɔ highschool when I was in Xanthi, he worked eee, ikɔðɔ`mes. in eee, buildings. Tɔ be`ʃe erɣɔ`lɑvɔs. He was a contractor. `Setne zɑm kɔ`gɑtu sɑ zɑustɑvili `rɑbutise, Later when the jobs started stopping, zɑ`fɑti, iz`lɑze nɑ Alɑ`mɑɲe dɑ `rɑbuti. he started, he went to Germany to work. 85 I `mɑjkɑ `rɑbuti ty`tyne. And my mother works on tobacco. Her `lætus sɑ`dime ty`tyne. Every summer we sow tobacco and I too I jæ `sɑde, ku`gɑnu si `idɑ ʃe…, ɑs sow, when I go I will…, with sowing I sɑ`denje ʃe sɑ uruʃ`tisvɑm `tsælu `lætu. preoccupy myself all summer. Sabri Aɑ `imɑ si `jeʃte ty`tyn pu … pu `vɑʃine Oh there is still tobaco in…in your places? 90 mes`tɑ ? Suat Xɔ `imɑ si. Yes there is. 164 165 Tɔ sxe`ðɔn `tsælu Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ sɑ`di ty`tyne. Almost all of Mandena sows tobacco. Xɑ `ɔti nɑ`gɔ—pɔ nɑ`gɔre se`lɑnɑ zø dɑ— Yes because the high—in the higher villages spræ. it started to – it stopped. 95 Vrit zɑ`fɑtixɑ Alɑ`mɑɲe dɑ vɑr`vøt. Everybody started going to Germany. Jɑ `spirɑt. Yes the stop. Nɑm, ɑj`sæ nɑm je ɑj`tɑm nɑ Bɑs`ɑjkɔvɔ, Ours, now ours is there in Mandena, `imɑ jen`nɔ istɔ`riɑ ɑ`pɔ pɑ`ʎɑ. there is a story from old times. Ee…ke nɑ mi su `ðinɔun… i dɑ ti ne `dɑvɔt Ee…even if they do not give you…even if 100 ty`tyne, dɑ ni is`kɑrɑʃ `mlɔgɔ, they do not give you tobacco, even if you do `rɑbɑti gɔ, not produce a lot of tobacco, work on it, dɑ ne ɑs`tɑnɑvɑʃ priz hitʃ `ɔti pɑk so that you are not left without any at all ɑ`ku `nemɑʃ hitʃ, ɑ`ku ne sɑ`diʃ hitʃ, de`mek because if you do not have any at all, if you `nemɑ dɑ `mɔʒiʃ dɑ is`kɑrɑʃ `nikɑnɑ. do not sow any, it means you will not be able to produce anything. 105 `Bɑre i `mifkɔ dɑ je dɑ `imɑʃ, dɑ `zømiʃ Little though it may be it is better to have, so `nækvɔ sene`de. that you get something in the year. I ne, ɑj`ni gu ne `tɑtʃime. Us too, we have that habbit. Zɑ tɔ gɔ sɑ`dime pɔ `mlɔgɔ ɑ`lɑ i sæ `glødɑm For that reason we sow it more but I see now `ʒene sɔ `ʒɔnet ɑj`sæ pɔ `mlɔzi gɔ ɑs`tɑvet. too those that get married now leave it. 165 166 110 As, ɑs `drugɑ `rɑbutɑ sɑ urɑʃ`tisɑɑt. With, with other things they occupy themselves with. Is`kɑrvɑt `nɔvɑ `rɑbutɑ. They come up with new things. Al ne, ɑj`sæ kɑk se `mɑjkɑ, `kɑknu `mɑjkɑ sɑ Well as us, now how is mom, as is mom are `druzi nɑ Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ. others in Mandena. Sɑ`døt vrit`tsi ty`tyn. All sow tobacco. 115 A`ku `dɔjdiʃ `lætus nɑ Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ `tsælɔ If you come in the summer to Mandena, ze`lenɔ Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ. Mandena (is) all green. Sabri `Trævɑ dɑ je i pɔ `xubɑvu, me`stɑnɑ zɑ It must be better, the fields for ty`tyn. tobacco. Pɔ sɑ `gɔrni mes`tɑ, pɔ bɑr`tʃini They are higher fields, more mountains 120 nɑ`gɔre pɑk ve kɑ`denu si`te kɑtu`gɑ je pɔ higher but where you stay it is more like a peði`ɑðɑ. plain. Suat `Hɑjɯr, ne `imɑme mes`tɑ, `imɑ-- `nemɑt No, we do not have fields, there is—not `mlɔzi gu`læmi mes`tɑ. many have large fields. Ne se ɑ`le `imɑ—`imɑme tri gu`læmi ɑj`tɑm. We again there is- we have 3 big ones there. 125 Sɑ`dime i `busene ɑj`tɑm i kɑ`lɑ `ine. We sow there this year too and it is good. `Idiʃ nɑ `mæstunu `zbirɑʃ ty`tynene nɑ re`hɑt You go to the field you collect the tobacco, `ɑmɑ pɔ `mlɔzi `imɑt, `imɑt pɑr`tʃe pɑr`tʃe at ease but more people have, have sections 166 167 rɑs`sætu nɑ `tsælu Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ. and sections scattered all over Mandena. `Nemɑ-- `nemɑ dɑ re`tʃeʃ kɑk tu There is not—there is not to say something 130 gu`læmu `mæstu dɑ re`tʃeʃ dɑ is`kɑrvɑt kɑ`lɑ like a big field to say that they produce ty`tyne. tobacco well. Pɔ `mlɔzine sɑ urɑʃ`tisɑɑt, be`læ je…zɑ Most preoccupy themselves, it is `sitʃku. difficult…for everthing. Sabri `Lætus `imɑli in`sɑn ? In the summer are there people? 135 Suat Læ- `imɑ, Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ `imɑ. Yes there are, Mandena has. Vrit`tsi sɑ pɑ Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ. All are in Mandena. `Jɑlnɯz se ku `imɑ je`din, `ɔti `imɔt i dru`zi Except if there is someone, because there are iz`lɑzeni nɑ Alɑ`mɑɲe dɑ `rɑbutet. others too who are out in Germany for work. `Jɑlnɯz `ʒɔne `idɑt se nɑ Alɑ`mɑɲe, `druzine Except for those that go to Germany, most of 140 pɔ `mlɔzine sɑ nɑ Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ. the others are in Mandena. `Nemɑ-- `nemɑt-- `nemɑme `nɯje in`sɑn There is not—they have not—we do not have `kɑknu dɑ se`døt nɑ Is`ketʃe, dɑ vɑr`vøt nɑ people who stay in Xanthi, who go to Is`ketʃe ne. Xanthi. Vrit`tsi sɑ nɑ Bɑ`sɑjkɔvɔ. All are in Mandena. 145 167 168 Sabri `Drugu? Kɑk pri`kɑrvɑte `lætunu? Anything else? How do you pass the Pu kɑ`de `xɔtte? summer? Where do you go? Suat `Lætɔnɔ `ine, tɔ `kiriɔ `ine ty`tynen. In the summer it is, the main thing is the tobacco. `Setne zɑm ɑ`ku `imɑ, ɑ`ku `nɑjdime Later if there is, if we find some mej`dɑne `mɔʒɔ dɑ `idime nɑ de`nizene, time we may go the sea, 150 `mɔʒɔ dɑ `idime nɑx `nekɔvɔ pik nik, we may go to a pic-nic, etc, istɔ`ries, ɑ`mɑ pɔ `mlɔzi ni nɑ`xɔdet but most people do not find mej`dɑnɑ `ɔti sɑ`døt ty`tyne pu `mlɔgu time because they sow tobacco for many `mlɔgu dø`lym i `tsælu `lætɔ `imɑt `rɑbɑtɔ acres and they have work to do for the whole `ɔti ty`tynen zre `bɔrʃkɔ. summer because the tobacco grows fast. 155 `Setne zɑm ku`gɑnɑ—ɑ`ku gɔ ni zbe`reʃ, And later when – if you do not collect it, it zɑ`fɑti dɑ `kɑpe. starts to fall. I ɑj`ni uzgɔ`bɔvɔʃ zɑm. And that way you lose then. `Rætku bɑn`nɔʃ dɑ sɑ `nɑjdime, dɑ iʃ `nækvɔ Very rarely do we find ourselves, do you go den dɑ iʃ `ili nɑ de`nizene `ili `næjde some day to the sea or somewhere 160 `drugide. else. Sabri Kɑk ti sɑ `zglævɑ fisikɔθerɑ`piɑ? How does physiotherapy seem to you? Suat Eee…be`læ je `mifkɔ `ɔti `imɑʃ jen`nɔk Eee…it is a little bit difficult because you 168 169 tʃy`lækɑ, dɑ`xɔde, `kɑzɑvɑti jen`nɔ `mæstu have a man, he comes, he tells you a place nɑ `tɔgɑ, `vikɑ ti bɑ`li mɑ ɑj`tui i `trævɑ dɑ on him, he tells you it hurts him here and 165 is`kɑrɑʃ `tɯ, `trævɑ dɑ mu is`kɑrɑʃ pe`ripu you need to come up with, you need to come kɑ`nɑ `imɑ. up with what he approximately has. `Veveɑ `xɔdi, priz dɑk`tɔrɑ `xɔdi nɑ`preʃ, Of course he goes, he goes by a doctor first, `imɑ ði`ɑɣnɔsi ɑ`pɔ jɑt`rɔ, ðilɑ`ði `ɑmɑ i he has a diagnosis from the doctor, that is to ku`gɑnɔ `dɔjde pɑk nɑ `tebe say that if and when he comes again to you 170 pɑk ti `imɑʃ jen`nɔ, `miɑ ðiɑðikɑ`siɑ, again you have a, a process, an evaluation to ɑksiɔ`lɔɣisi dɑ make. Gu `stɔrʒiʃ, kɑ`nɑ je pe`ripu, You grind it, what it approximately is, `ɔti i duk`tɔrɑn `mɔʒe dɑ bɑn`nɔʃ dɑ gu because the doctor may sometimes come up is`kɑrɑ jɑn`lɯʃ. with something wrong. 175 `Mifkɔ je be`læ ɑd nɔj `strɑnɑ i… ku`gɑnu It is a bit difficult from that side and… when mu `prɑviʃ θerɑ`piɑ, i tɑm je `mifkɔ `ðiskɔlɑ you perform therapy on him, and there too tɑ `prɑɣmɑtɑ `ɔti, `ɑmɑ, ɑ`ku `stɔriʃ `nækvɔ things are a bit difficult because, but, if you `lɑθɔs, `mætɑ tɑ jættse nɑt`tzɑt. make some mistake, it throws you back a lot. Sxe`ðɔn ɑ`pɔ tin ɑr`xi ɑr`xizis. You almost start from the beginning. 180 Aj`ni. At `pɔrvutu mi sɑ `zglævɑʃe `jættse Like that. From the beginning it seemed be`læ i sæ nɑ `ɔti pɔ to me very difficult and now because I got 169 170 ɑlɯʃ`tisɑx `mifku, `videx `derse, `xɔdeʃe nɑ used to it a bit, saw courses, went to the hɑstɑ`nø, `videʃɔ ɑliθi`nɑ peristɑti`kɑ, ɑj`se hospital, saw true incidents, now mi sɑ `zglævɑ, pɔ gɔ zɑ`fɑtix dɑ gɔ, dɑ gɔ it seems, I started more to, I learnt it well, 185 nɑ`jø, dɑ `vikɑm `ɔti `mɔʒɔm dɑ gu `prɑvem and to say that I can do it with me siɣurj`ɑ. certainty. Sabri Kɑtʃin`dʒi gu`dinɑ si ? Which year are you in? Suat Aj`sæ je `mɔne dørtyn`dʒy. Now it is my fourth. Sabri Ku`gɑ `hesɑbiʃ dɑ `svɔrʃiʃ? When do you think you will finish? 190 Suat Aj`sæ, nɑ ɑj`zi ek`sɑminɔ, ɑd ɑj`zi ek`sɑminɔ Now, here this semester, from this semester i `setne, zɑ`fɑtɑm dɑ `dɑvɑm ut `stɑri and later, I start sitting for older `dersve. courses. `Nemɑ ɑjsæ `nɔvi `derse dɑ `zimɑm. I will not be taking new courses. Kɑk sɔ vɑr`vi ɑj`sæ, nɑ ɑj`zi ek`sɑminɔ As it is going now, this semester it is going 195 vɑr`vi `jæ-- `xubeve. ve-- well. Pɑ`minɑm der`sese i `drugunu ek`sɑminɔ I pass the courses and the next semester if, if ɑ`kɔ, `ɑkɔ `ide ɑj`si, nɑ `drugu nu `lætu ʃe it goes like this, next summer I will be doing `prɑvem prɑkti`ki. my practice. Sabri Xmm…`xubeve. Hmm…good. 170 171 200 Suat ʃe `dɔvɑrʃem. I will finish. Sabri U`retsnuvɑtɑ `retʃe? You said you like it? Suat Xɔ, ɑj`sæ i `kɔlkusu vɑr`vi. Yes, now and as it goes. `Kɔlkusu sɑ nɑ`utʃem `rɑbɑti zɑ`fɑtɑ pɔ dɑ The more I learn things I start more to, to mi sɑ, dɑ mɑ ɑ`resɑvɑ. like it. 205 At `pɔrvɔtɔ pɔ mi be`ʃɔ `nɔkɑk eee… `itɑn From the beginning it was more like eee… it ði`ɑspɑrtɑ ɑs `pume. was scattered let’s say. Pɑ`jæʃe ɑj`tuz, niz ɑj`tuzinɑ, ɑjnɑ`zi, `vikɔm, I read here, from this, that, I say, I could ðe bɔ`rusɑ nɑ tɑ sinði`ɑsɔ, i sæ zɑ`fɑti dɑ not combine them, and now I started to `imɑm pɔ `mlɔgɔ plirɔfɔ`ries, ðia`vɑzɔ have more information, I read 210 viv`liɑ. books. Zɑ`fɑti pɔ dɑ mi so… ɑ`resɔvɑ tɔ I started more to… like the e`pɑngelmɑ. profession. Sabri Kɑk`vɔ sɑ `tʃydiʃ, ʃe ut`vɔriʃ si `tvɔjy fɑf What do you think, are you going to open Is`ketʃe ? your own in Xanthi? 215 Suat At `pɔrvɔsɔ ɑj`sæ ne `ɔti je `mifkɔ epi`kinðinɔ From the start now no because it is a little dɑ ɑt`vɔriʃ ɑt `pɔrvusu bit dangerous to open from the start a 171 172 fisikɔθerɑpef`tiriɔ. physiotherapy center. Eee…pɔ nɑx `setne ku`gɑnu `idɑ nɑ ɔn dɑ si Eeee…more like later when I go outside to `stɔre jæ kɑk`nɑ nu `iʃtɑ, tɔ `ɔnirɔ nɑ `kɑnɔ do for myself what I want, to make my 220 prɑɣmɑti`kɔtitɑ. dream come true. Pɔ nɑx `setne zɑm `mɔʒe `ɔti ɑj`tɑm `pɑnɔ stɑ More like later then I might because there up xɔ`rjɑ ɑ`ku `stɔriʃ, ɑ`ku `stɔri in the villages if you do, if one fisikɔθerɑpef`tiriɔ `mɔʒe dɑ `rɑbɑtem. does a physiotherapy center I might work. Aj`ni `værɑm `ɔti `imɑ `mlɔzi in`sɑn That is how I believe because there are many 225 ɑsxɔ`lunde me people who occupy themselves with ɑɣrɔ`tjɑ, istɔ`ries. agriculture, etc. `Værvɑm `ɔti ʃe `imɑ `rɑbutɑ ɑj`sæ, ɔt I believe that there will be work now, from `pɔrvɔsɔ ne `iʃtɔm dɑ gu ðiɑkinði`nefsɑm `ɔti the start I do not want to take a risk because `mɔʒe dɑ sɑ zɑ… nɑ me… it might…to me… 230 Sabri …Me ti `krisi `vikɑʃ… …With the crisis you say… Suat …nɑ `pjɑsɔ pɑtɔ. …I might hit rock bottom. I ɑj`sæ me tin `krisi `cɔlɑs du gɑ dɑ `kupiʃ… And now with the crisis too, until you buy… zɑ dɑ ut`vɔriʃ jen`nɔ fisikɔθerɑpef`tiriɔ nɯj in order to open a physiotherapy center at the `mɑlkɔ jir`mibin ev`rɔ … very least twenty thousand euros… 172 173 235 Sabri Xmm. Wɑw… Hmm. Wow… Suat Dɑ `kupiʃ `ɔlɑ tɑ ɑpɑ`retitɑ mixɑ`nimɑtɑ, dɑ To buy all the necessary machines, to have `imɑʃ tɔ ɑpɑ`retitɔ `xɔrɔ… the necessary space… Sabri `Tæli `imɑte i `mɑkini, iði`kɑ `mɑkini? Do you also have machines, specialised machines? Suat Xɔ `imɑ. Yes there is. 240 `Imɑ zɑ iletrɔθerɑ`piɑ, zɑ iðrɔθerɑ`piɑ, There is for electrotherapy, for hydrotherapy, kinisjɔθerɑ`piɑ, `imɑ ɑj`rɯ ɔdɑ`jø `prɑiʃ. movement therapy, there is a different room that you make. `Iʃte `mifkɔ gu`læmɔ `ktiriɔ dɑ `imɑʃ. It necessitates a bit of a big building to have. Eee… zɑ dɑ `stɔriʃ … zɑ dɑ `mɔʒɔʃ dɑ Eeee…in order to make…in order to be able `prɑviʃ vɑsi`ki θerɑ`piɑ. to perform basic therapy. 245 Dɑ xɔ—dɑ`xɔdet, `glødɑt tɔ `merɔs ɑ`ku They co- they come, they see the place if `mɔʒɑ dɑ klɑ`deʃ tɑ mixɑ`nimɑtɑ e`ki `mesɑ, you can put the machines in there, nɑ ðu`lepsis `ɑnetɑ i `dɑvɑt ti `engrisi ɑt if you can work comfortably and they grant `setne. approval later. `Kupiʃ tɑ mixɑ`nimɑtɑ ke me`tɑ ɑr`xizis nɑ You buy the machinery and then you start 250 ðu`levis. working. Zɑ`tɔ `mifkɔ je epi`kinðinɑ nɑ ɑr`xisis le That is why it is a bit dangerous to start just iz`lezis ɑt me`tʃitene dɑ ut`vɔriʃ as you graduate from the school to open a 173 174 fisikɔθerɑpef`tiriɔ `ɔti ne znɔʃ ɑ`ku ʃe zɑ`fɑtiʃ physiotherapy center because you do not dɑ `rɑbɑtiʃ, know if you are going to start working, if 255 ɑ`ku ʃe tɑ `tʃyjet dru`zine `ɔti nɑ the others are going to hear of you because Is`ketʃe `imɑ `mlɔzi fisiɔθerɑpef`tes. in Xanthi there are many physiotherapists. `Ine `liɣɔ epi`kinðina. It is a bit dangerous. A`la po nax `setne `moʒo. But later I might. 259 Ne sa u`tʃil du aj`nolkuz da`letʃe. I have not studied that far. 174 175 APPENDIX RECORDING 6 Speakers: Aishe (51), Fatme (42), Sabri (26), Necmi (57), Erkan (21), Bediha (65), Fehmi (44), Leyle (39) Topic: Casual Conversation – Stories from the past – Routine Pomak dialects spoken: Glafki, Pachni Line/ Pomak English Translation Speaker 1 Aishe Kɑ`nɑ `prɑvet `mlɑdine? How are the young doing ? Leyle `Xubeve sɑ. They are well. Nɑ Aŋ`liɑ sɑ dvɑ `dene. They are two days in England. Jæ mi `rekɑx dɑ pɑse`døt, dɑ mi ne `prɑvime I told them to stay, so as not to make 5 sɑf`rɔ. the table for a meal. `Vikɑ S. `ɔti ni pɑse`dæxte, dɑ vi `kɑʒime, S. says why did you not stay, to tell you, so dɑ ni `prɑvime, `vikɑ, hiz`met, sɑf`rɔ. that we do not go into, he says, trouble, to make a table for a meal. Pɑk te si `vikɑ `idɑt. But they say they are returning. `Nemɑ, ʃe si mɑ fɑf mɑs`rɑfɑ pɑk fɑf`vrøt. No, again they will put us into expenses. 10 Zɑ`rɑr je, ig`re. It is a harm, he jests. Atiʃ`lisɑ, ne`meɑsi ɑ`bere. They have gone, he has no news of it. `Imɑ M., `imɑ jen`nɔ H. gu zvɔt, ve gu `nemɑ There is M., there is one called H., you will `znɑite. not know him. 175 176 At`sekɑxme zɑ `tɔpɑte zɑ `mɑtʃe i ɑt`sekɑl gu We cut tickets for the footbal for the match and he has cut tickets without, without 15 je prez, prez ɑ`bere. informing. Nɑ Ang`liɑ zɑ `mɑtʃe, zɑ dvɑ dene. In England for a match, for two days. Erkan Fɑf Ang`liɑ? In England? Fehmi `Arsenal i Ga`lata sa `bili. Arsenal and Galata have been playing. Leyle Zɑ`tɔ sɑ…. That is why they have… 20 Fatme Tɔ `vikɑʃe ɑ`gɑ be dɑʃ`lili, `mɑtʃes, `titʃer sɑs He was saying when they had come, the N., ɑ`gɑ be dɑʃ`lili, tæ ɑ`lɑbri, pɑk ʃe match, the teacher with N., when they had `fɔrkɑ, ig`ræʃe. come, she will probably, again fly, he jested. I tæ se le ɑ`bɔrnɔ, nɑx kɑ`de, `vikɑ, se`di se, And she just turned over, where to, she says, vikɑ. stay now, she says. 25 Le `nikɑk, ʃe `fɔrkɑʃ ɑ`lɑbir ti. No way, you will probably fly. Sabri Kut`ri nɑx Ang`liɑ ? Who to England? Aishe N. sɑs `ʒøtu sɑ u`ʒeni. N. with the person she got married to. Fatme Sɑs S. With S. Tɔ gu `titʃer le `vikɑme. We keep calling him teacher. 30 Sabri Tɑ`mɑm je, tɑ`mɑm je. It is OK, it is OK. `Xubɑvu je pu ɑj`tɑm `jættse. It is very good there. 176 177 Necmi `Znɑiʃ li gu ti ? Do you know him? Sabri Puz`nɑl gu bex ud N. nɔ`mizɔ. I had met him from N. I think. `Ixɑ `pɑi mjɑ fɔ`rɑ ud Ge`tʃebunɑr `kɑpɔs I had gone by Glafki once somehow like 35 `etsi. this. Ashe Tɔ nɑ jen`nɯʃ ɑ`lɑbri i ti ɑ`gɑtu be`ʃe i tɔ, i Once probably when you too were there, he tɔ be`ʃe. was too. Sabri Ne, `ili tɔ `ixe `erθi, nɔ`mizɔ ɑj`tus `ekɑne No, or he had come, I think he was doing `kɑpjes `ɔres ɑj`tus. here some hours. 40 Fatme Tɔ be ɑj`tus nɑ jen`nɯʃ dɑ`ʃɔl zɑ `mɑlku. He had come here once for a little. Leyle Pɑk E. je ne `xɔdil. But E. has not been. Ne mu je `dɑlɑ ʒe`nɑnɑ. His wife has not let him `Vikɑ, kɑ`e pɔʃ sɑs `tɯje? She says, where are you going with them? As tri `deti ti pɔʃ nɑ gez`mø? With three kids you are going for a trip? 45 `Vikɑ, `sedi ɑj`tukɑ. She says, stay there. Fatme A`kɔ je ɑj`nɑ `dete? What kind is that kid? Leyle `Ʒɔntskɔ. A girl. Aishe `Pɔle S. kɑk je nɑ`rɑl. Look how S. has grown. Fehmi Tɔ `bu`gyn pe`tʃe. It was hot today. 50 Aishe Nɑ `kɔlku je? How old is he? 177 178 Fehmi `Bugyn be jættse `xubɑvu. It was very good today. Aishe `Burʒy vɑr`vøt gu`dinise. The years pass fast. Sabri Je`vɑʃ je `jɑettse S. S. is very quiet. `Miʃek ɑ`gɑtu be kɑtu`gɑ be ne je`vɑʃ. When he was little I think he was not quiet. 55 Leyle `Mitʃkɔ pɑk li nɑ E. be. When he was little he was like E. Fatme Dɑ mɑ `miʃek S. pɑk hɑs, ne si `gøde ɔ Yes but when S. was little, he was not that kɑ`dɑr pɑk. much. Leyle Ne ɑk`nɑ, zɑ`tʃydisɑ dɑ `znɑiʃ, ɑ`lɑbri ʃe No what, when he is pensive you should rɑz`biɔ. know, he probably will break something. 60 Fatme Tɔ be i spu`minɑʃli si K.? K. was too do you remember? A`gɑ be `miʃkɑ K. When K. was little. Leyle Re`tʃeʃ li mu, ku mu ni re`tʃeʃ, dɑj mi gu næl, Whether you tell him, or do not tell him, re`tʃeʃ li gu dɑj, ku mu gɔ `iʃtiʃ dɑ mu gu give it to me, if you tell him to give it, if `zømiʃ, ʃe gɔ `zøme `mɑksus ʃe gɔ pɑfɑr`ni you want to take it from him, he will take it 65 dɑ e kɑ`eʃte, ʃe sɑ rɑz`bie. and will throw it anywhere on purpose, and it will break. Fatme K. be ɑj`ni. K. was like that. ʃe `zøme fil`dʒæn `ili bɑr`dɑk, i tæ S. She will take a cup or a glass, and S. will ʃe sɑ zɑtɑr`tʃi `bɔrʒy dɑ e `fɑti. start running to quickly grab her. Kɑk, dɑ gu ni `metne dɑ sɑ rɑz`bije. How, so that she does not throw it and it breaks. 178 179 70 I tæ, `ɑnne, i `smesɑ. And she, mom, and laughs. A`de dɑ `ide S. i tæ gɔ `metne, `stɑne Until S. arrives she drops it, it becomes pɑ`rɑmpɑrtʃe. a countless pieces. Aishe Tɔ i svɑ, i S. `miʃku. This too, S.’s young one. Fatme Zɑm, ɔt je ɑjtek`vɔs, kak, plɑ`kɑki, bɑr`dɑk Then, because it is that, how, tiles, she 75 pɔfɑr`ni, tɔ `stɑne `pepel `vɔtre. throws a glass, it becomes ash inside. Ni `znɑje ɑt kɑ`de dɑ zɑ`fɑti dɑ `zbirɑ. She does not know where to begin to collect. Leyle Zɑm be, Rɑmɑ`zɑn be. Then it was, it was the month of fasting. I `klɑli gɔ sime ɑf perpɑ`turɑ. And we have put him in a walker. Af perpɑ`turɑ gu si`me `klɑli, i zɑm sɑ be In a walker we have put him, and then the 80 nɑ`tʃikɑl perpɑ`turɑnɑ. walker had cracked. N. mɑ `stɔri dɑ zɑ`vøʒɑme terke`lekɑte N. made us tie the wheel dɑ si mu vɑr`vi. so that it walks again. A`tide mu sɑ ɑt`bɑvi. It went and got broken. Nɑ Rɑmɑ`zɑn, te `rɑnimesɑ, tɔj sɑ je In the fasting month, we were about to dine, 85 zɑɑr`livil `ɔti gu `pɔnɑpreʃ se `smɑtʃkɔm, he has become snotty because I earlier was `melem gu ɑf `mikserɑn. smashing it, grinding it in the mixer. Pɑk I., le ti sɑ `mɔlem, `bɔkʃem gu And I., I pray to you please, tonight 179 180 `nɑrɑni pɔ `rɑnu `zere mɑ je gnus dɑ sɑ feed him earlier because I am disgusted to `nɑem ɑt `ʒøtu je`de. eat because of what he is eating. 90 `Zimɑ ɑz rɑ`kɔnɑ. He takes with the hand. Zɑ`fɑtil sɑ je… He has started to… `Sipɑl mu sɑm pɑk de dɑ dɑm `sipi mu I have poured him but until I give him pour `nækvɑ lɑ`ʒitʃkɔ ɔt ʃe sɑ e`de dɑ sɑ nɑe`de. him a little spoon to eat because it will be eaten either way. Dɑ, `tebe pɑk `nemɑ, `vikɔm, `nemɑ pɑk ni ɑt OK, in your case, I say, there is no benefit 95 perpɑ`turɑtɑ ɑ`ir. even from the walker. `Videxme ɑjte`kɔvɑ `rɑbɔtɑ. We saw that kind of thing. Sɑ`mɔ si mu, pɑk `trɯpkɑli, ɑbi`nɑse, Alone he was, but there where sounds being ɑbi`xɑde pɑ `ɔtre pɑk ni ɑr`vi mɑ. made, it is going to and fro inside but he does not walk. Fatme Tɑ`gɑn teli`kɑ, jen`nɔnɑ e tɑ`gɑj jevɑʃ. Then after all, the one is quiet. 100 Aishe `Drugu nu… The other… Leyle Pɑk N. dɑ `ɔniki gɔ`dini sɑ is`kuti, ne sɑ But N. grew to the age of 12, they did not `znɑli tɑ `imɑm `dete. know that I had a child. `Mitʃkɔ nu be pɑk, hem `sitʃkɔ `prɑveʃe `bɑbi The young one though, not only was he pɑk… doing all kinds of things to granny… 105 Fatne Pɑk S. pɑk i `dvete xi sɔ iperkiniti`kɑ. But S.’s are both hyperactive. 180 181 Aishe Ud `miʃki…. From little ones… Sabri Tɔ S. `itɑne stɑ `ɔriɑ prɔ`vlimɑtɔs… S. was on the borders of being a problem… Fatme Dɑ S. je pɔ `jɑettse. So S. is more. Leyle Pɑk N., N. dɑj en`nɔk Mɑ`sutevɔ But N., give N. a bag from 110 pɑ`kule næl, vɑv`re. Masoutis, she put. Pɑ kɑje`mete tytyne sɑm `bɑbi bɑn`nɯʃ I have done countless tobacco sometimes for `prɑvilɑ, i zɑ`mitɑlɑ sɑm, `sitʃku sɑm granny, I have cleaned too, I have done all `prɑvilɑ, `nikɑknɑ ni mu be ne. things, it was nothing to her. Je`din Mɑ`sutif gu`læm pɑ`kul ʃe gu le She will be staring at a large Masoutis bag, 115 `glødɑ, ʃe li ʃy`mi. and will make sounds with it in her hands. `Vikɔm `bɑbi, `pɑnneli Mɑ`sutif pɑ`kul, I tell granny, if a Masoutis bag falls, ɑd`mɑxnɑj gu nɑ krɑj. set it aside. Rɑzde`re li gɔ ? Does she tear it? Ni rɑzde`re Mɑ`suti. She does not tear Masoutis. 120 `Vikɔm, vrit pɑ`kulete de`ræʃe, `ɔlum I say, she tore all bags, except those from Mɑ`sutivite ɔt `gøde pɑ`ri i`mæ, kɑk, Masoutis because it looked like it had is`kɑrɑnu ɑjnɑ`i. money, how, printed on it. Bediha Ajnɑ`i `gøde. Looked like that. Leyle Ajnɑ`i be`ʃe `ɔlum. That was only. 125 181 182 Sabri Kut`rɔ ɑj`ni? Who was like that? Aishe N. N. Sabri N. ? Xɑɑ? N.? Really? Aishe `Imɑ be. There are of course. Jen`ni si sɑ pɔ je`vɑʃ. Some are quieter. 130 Leyle `Drugɑkne `vetʃerɑ, `slizɑme dɑ e`deme. The other night, we descend to eat. I. `vikɑ, ɑk`nɑ ʃe go `vika `rɑniʃ `bɔɑʃem. I. says, what are you going to feed him tonight. Le ti sɑ `mɔlem ɑjne`kɔj `murgɔ `etɑ I pray to you please that kind of black bɑrkɑ`tinɑ ni`mɔ gɔ `rɑni jæ ɑ`gɯnɔ, ɑ`gɯnɔ mixture do not feed him when when I `rɑne. dine. 135 A`gɯnɔ, `vikɑ, `slizɑme ɑ`dɔl dɑ e`deme, When, he says, we descend downwards to `vikɑ, ɑ `ɔti gnus mɑ e, zɑm jæ… eat, he says, because I am disgusted, then I… `Ʒønu `smelenu. The grinded one. `Smelenu ud kɑ`rote ɑjne`kon `nɔɑknɔ. Smashed from carrots something like that. Ko ne nɑ`rɑni gɔ `zere, `vikɑ i `nɑʃenu ɑj`zæ. If not feed him then, he says, ours too. 140 `Nɑrɑni gu `vikɑ, ni `stigɑ tʃi mɔ gɔ sɑm Feed him he says, it does not suffice that I `smelelɑ ɑm `iʃte dɑ e`de pɑ `mlɔgɔ. have grinded it but it wants to eat a lot too. Aj`ni je `jælu. He ate that much. Aj`ni je `jælu. He ate that much. 182 183 Hɑs je ɑj`ni. It really is like that. 145 Am tɔ be `jættse nɑ`prɑvenu ɑ`gɑ be `mitʃko. Well he was very healthy when he was little. Nɑe`desɑ, nɑe`de. He eats, eats. `Ikɑ I., `nemɑ `ikɑ hɑ`ir. I. says, there is no point. Ni`mɔʒɔ sɑ nɑe`de. It cannot satiate its hunger. Je bɔ`bɑjkɔ, ʃe sɑ u`dɑvime, ku sɑ is`pekɑli He and father have cooked for the two of 150 nɑ en`nɔ dɑ e`dɔt `dvene. them, we will suffocate. `Vikɑ i ku si me nɑ en`nɔ, `ikɑ bu`bɑjkɔ, i He says if we are together, father says, and S. sɑ nɑ`mesi, ni`mɔʒime sɑ nɑe`deme. S. is added to the mix, we cannot eat. `Vikɑ dɑ gu `rɑnem bir sɑ`ɑt nɑ`preʃ zɑm dɑ He says I should feed it an hour before then `slizɑt nɑ`dɔl. for them to descend down. 155 Sabri Aj`si `jenge S. `jættse `xrɑneʃe S. i K. This way S. fed S. and K. a lot. Li `sitʃku. Everything. Aishe Tæ i S. va`ræʃe… S. cooked too… Sabri Tu stil, `løʃtɑ sɑs `jæbɑlkɑ, `kɑpɔs `etsi. For example, lentils with apple, something like this. Fehmi A`gɑ iʃ nɑ `bɔlnu, `vikɑm ni`mɔ se`dæ When you go to a sick person, I say do not 160 `mlɔgu. stay a lot. Necmi Tɔ `nemɑ `nækvu fɑz`lɔ be. There is not anything much though. 183 184 Aishe Dɑ be ve si`te ne `tʃyzdi. OK but you are not strangers. Fehmi De nɑ `dɑvɑme i`zet. To not give trouble. Necmi Tæ je pɑ`reɑsɑ `xubɑvɑ. The company is good. 165 Fatne `Zømi si S. Take S. Sabri `Sɑɔl. Thanks. Aishe Dø mar… You too. Fatme `Zømi mɑ`ri. Do take. Necmi Tɔ je ɑjs`vɑ `bɔlnu `inɑkvɔ. This kind of sick is different. 170 Bediha Nɑ bɑj`ræm. On the Eid celebrations. Fehmi Ku`gɑ `lægɑte ve? When do you go to sleep? Fatme `Zømi si. Do take. Bediha Niʃ`tɔ, niʃ`tɔ, ne si je. I don’t want, I don’t want, I do not eat it. Dɑ, dɑ, `zømi si. OK, OK, do take. 175 I jæ gu `zø, u`tide u ne`væstɑ. And I took it, went to a newly-wed bride. Fehmi Næl ti `vikɑm dɑ ne jæm `slɑtkɔ. I told you I do not eat sweets. Bediha `Zømi i ti tʃykɑ`lɑtɑ, i jæ `klɑdɑx ud `vɑʃøno. Take a chocolate too, and I put from your ones. Nel gø dɑ si `zømiʃ ? Weren’t you supposed to take? Dɑ`nese mi `jeʃte jen`no. You brought me one more. 180 Leyle `Næli ɔret`meninɑn dɑl næl, `nemɑ dɑ Wasn’t the teacher, I will not forget your 184 185 `zɑbɔrɑvem `lelkɔti. aunt. Kɑk`nɑ ɔret`menin `itʃe, dɑ `idiʃ dɑ `zbirɑʃ What does a teacher want, for you to go to tʃep`je brej, `vikɑ, dɑ tɑ ni pri`lægɑ. collect sticks, she says, it does not become you. Tɑ i jæ, ɔret`menin, ɑk`nɑ `iʃteʃ dɑ mu Me too, a teacher, what do you want and say 185 re`tʃeʃ sɑs `kutsɑ `nɔgɔ pɔ luku`mɑðes dɑ mu to him with a limpy foot to bake cookies for `prɑviʃ. him. `Sedi se vre, `igrɑm mɑj`tɑp i ti. Sit, I am joking. At `selɔ dɑ ɑj`tuj, ɑf ku`fine `brɑʃnɔ. From the village till here, flour in a basket. Fehmi `Nemɑ li ɑf pɑ`kul ɑj`si ? Is there not in a bag like this? 190 Leyle Tʃi dɑ, næl `trævɑ vrit pɑ`kule `nemu dɑ OK, do not all have to be giving him `dɑɔt. too? Fatme Aj`ni mu `vikɑʃe mɑr. She was telling him so. Aishe Kut`rɔ ? Who? Fatme `Lelkɑ mu B. His aunt B. 195 Leyle Vɑj kɑk sɑ nɑ`smevɑx vɑl`lɑi. I promise I laughed a lot. Dɑ viʃ kɑk ɑj`ni `dumi. You should see how she talks like that. Aishe `Lelkɑ ti B. `miʒyti `vikɑ. Your aunt B. telling your uncle. Sabri Kɑk je `vikɑlɑ? What was she saying? Aishe `Vikɑ, kɑk`nɑ `iʃtiʃ… She says, what do you want… 200 185 186 Fatme Ɔt kɑk je, tʃim `xɔdi, `vikɑ, dɑ `nɑgledɑm zɑ Since he is, I went, he says, to look for tʃep`je. sticks. Tɑ ɔret`menin, `vikɑ, dɑ `idiʃ ti tʃep`je dɑ So a teacher as you, he says, should go, you, `zbirɑʃ. to collect sticks. Leyle Tɔ tɑ `vikɑ li hitʃ ni pri`lægɑ ɔt si ɔret`menin, It does not become you at all because you 205 dɑ `zbirɑʃ, `vikɑ, tʃep`je. are a teacher, to collect, she says, sticks. Kɑk sɑ nɑ`smævɑx. How I laughed. Bediha Dɑ ɑ`vidi, tɔ je se ɔd jen`nɔ `strɑnɑ tæ ti gu OK look, from one side she does not tell it ne `vikɑ zɑ `lɔʃu. to you as a bad thing. Tɔ se `vikɑ kɔ je ne `xɔdil gu je `nemɑ `pɑtil. That person says that if he had not gone it 210 would not have happened. Aishe Ni`mæ dɑ… It wouldn’t… Bediha Pɑk tɔ i `tuj dɑ je bil ʃe si gu je u`patil. But even if he was here it would have happened to him. Fatme Am dɑ, ɑ`ku be pɑk ne `xɔdil, Y., kɑk te But OK, if he had not gone, Y., how would I `vɑlem sɔ`bɑsɑ ? have lit the fireplace? `Nemɑ dɑ `mɔʒem dɑ je `vɑlem `nikɑk. I wouldn’t have at all been able to light it. 215 Necmi `Ɔstɑvise ti, jæ beh ɑjn`vɑk den ne uti`ʃøl Let that be, I had not gone that day for zɑ`tɔ. that. Jæ beh uti`ʃøl ɑ`læ… I had gone to… Fatme Ne, zɑ `drudʒiʃ vɑr`væʃe, pɑk ɑjnɑ`gɑni hɑs No, other times he went, but then he says, 186 187 `vikɑ, jæ `pɔdɑm dɑ `nɑgledɑm, `vikɑ nɑ I am going to look for, he says in Karmila 220 Kɑrmi`lɑnɑ `imɑli, `vikɑ, zɑm, if there are, he says, then. `Vikɑ, jæ ne `vervɑm ɑm li dɑ `videm `imɑli, He says, I don’t believe but just to see if `vikɑ. there is, he says. Ne be ɑti`ʃɔl zɑ dɑ `xɔdi dɑ `zbirɑ. He hadn’t gone so as to go to collect. Bediha Tɑ`mɑm mɑr. OK. 225 Næl ti `vikɔm, ɑ`gɑ `imɑ `nækvɔ dɑ Do not I tell you, if there is anything for you pre`kɑrɔʃ, ʃe ti sɑ nɑ`xɔde ɑjnɑ`i, se`bepɔn. to pass, a thing will be found, a cause. Necmi M. ɑj`tɑm… M.’s there… Sabri Aj`tus stɔ iðiɔti`kɔ kɑ`desu `ðɑsɔssu, ud`tzɑt Here in the private where the forest is, ɑj`tɑm ? behind there? 230 Necmi Pjɔ iðiɔti`kɔ re ? Which private? Sabri Niz `kɑksu pɔʃ nɑx Vɑl`kɑnvu. As you go through towards Aimonio. Necmi Xɔ be, ɑj`tɑm. Yes, there. Aishe Xɔ, nɑx Kɑrmi`lɑnɑ. Yes, towards Karmila. Sabri `Setix sɑ, `setix sɑ. I understood, I understood. 235 Necmi Kɑ`denu `slivi `imɑme. Where we have prunes. A`lɑ si je `lelkɑ ɑj`ni. But aunt is like that. Fatme Ne sɑm `dɑvɑlɑ tʃyku`lɑtu. I haven’t given chocolate. 187 188 `Zømi si. Do take. Necmi Tæ mi `kɑzvɑʃe ke pɔs nɑ `dinɔme. She told me how to dress myself too. 240 Kɑk`nɑnu nɑ`dævɑm je ne zɑ `mene. What I wear is not for me. Bu`fɑn ke `tetjɑ. Jackets and such. Fatme Xɔ, ɔt gu `vidi sɑs bu`fɑn, kɑk, N. li ɑp`lɔ Yes, because she sees him with jackets, how, bu`fɑn `zøme, nɑ`dene. N. gets a simple jacket, and wears it. Ajne`kɔs, `kɑrɑlɑ gu be`ʃe. That, she was chastizing him. 245 Tɔ ɑjtɑ`i je ne zɑ`tebe. That is not for you. `Vikɑ, kɑk tɑ F. ɑs`tɑve ? She says, how does F. let you? `Vikɑ, dɑ nɑ`devɔʃ ɑjte`kivɑ. She says, do not wear like that. `Vikɑm, ɑ`mɔti kɑk`nɑ ? I say, why what? Ne je `xubɑvu. It is not good. 250 Pɔ `xubɑvu ti dɑ `nɔsiʃ. You should wear better. Bediha Tɔ si `je `sæku ɑz ɑj`rɯ ɑ`kɯlɑ. Everybody is with a different mind. Necmi Tɔ sɑm i jæ, `vikɑm, kɑk`vɔtu i `drugite vrit I too am, I say, like all the other in`sɑnɑt jɑu. people. Sabri Aj`sæ ɑ`gɑsu i`dæxme, ɑ`gɑ si i`dæxme næl, Now while we were coming, when we were 255 be`xɑ, nɔ kut`rɔ me`tæʃe, `nɔkutrɑ `mijeʃe i returning, they were, someone was sweeping, tæ be ɑjn`vɑ, nɑ `dʒemɑn, `sutʃeʃe. someone was cleaning and she was that, on the window, she was swiping. 188 189 Aishe Tæ be`ʃe N. ɑj`nɔs. That was N. Sabri Nɑ `dʒæmɑn i tæ, ud `vɔtre `mɔtʃeʃe dɑ Her too on the windows, was trying to clean 260 `mije. from the inside. Fatme Kɔ`tri, B.? Who, B.? Zɑ bɑj`ræm si, tæ si se pɑk ɑjrɯ `kɔʃtɑ. For the Eid celebrations, she too in a separate house. Aishe Ne li i jæ ɑj`sæ `pusnɑx plin`dirje. I just switched on the washing machine. Ku`gɑ `utre pɑk ? When tomorrow again? 265 Fatme Tɔ i jæ ɑ`læ, jæ pɑk `snɔʃti ɑjne`kɔs ɑj`tɔs Me too, I did those curtains last per`dø… night… Erkan `Ɔnsekiz sɑ ɑm ni `znɑjem ʃe gi is`kɑrvɑm li They are 18 but I do not know if I will do vrit. them all. `Mɔʒe i pɔ `mɑlku dɑ `stɔrem. I may do fewer. 270 Dɑ `vidime. We will see. Necmi Tɔ bɑ`jæ `znɑje. He knows quite a lot. Fatne `Drugɑtɑ ud`mɑxnɑx, u`prɑx je ɑj`sɔs tɑ I removed the other, I washed this and `vikɑm `ɔti li ɑj`ses be`xɑ pu `drugen say because only these were during the other bɑj`ræm, kɑh`vørenine pɑk dɑ si `klɑdɑm. Eid celebrations,I should put the brown ones. 275 Fehmi ʃe mu si re`tʃe sɑ`mi. He will tell him by himself. 189 190 Fatme Dɑ je `bɑre ɑp`rɑtɑ. At least for it to be washed. Erkan Dɑ`nɔ je. May it be. Po nɑ`preʃ, da gu `zɔmam pɔ na`preʃ. Sooner, to take it sooner. Aishe Kɑ`limɑtɑ? Covers? 280 Fatme Xɔ mɑr. Yes. `Ʒøte nɑ`preʃnet, fɑf bɑj`ræm. Those in the previous one, in the Eid celebrations. Necmi `Trævɑ dɑ `zømiʃ `ɔti… You have to get because… Aishe Tʃi tɔ je `xubɑvu ɑ`gɑ sɑ pɔ prume`ni. Well it is good when it changes a bit. Fehmi `Træbvɑ, `dɑjmɑ `træbvɑ. It is necessay, always necessary. 285 Ne ɑt`bɑvesɔ. It does not go off. Fatme Am ɑ`gɑ je u`prɑtu, `inɑkvɔ je. But when it is washed, it is different. Necmi `Lɑxɑsɑ F. F. happened. Ajtu`gɑs `retʃe, nɑ Is`ketʃe bex`me, efke`riɑ, Then she said, we were in Xanthi, a `zø gu. chance, she took it. 290 E `trævɑ mi ɑj`sæ. Well I need her now. Ni `mɔgɑm jæ… I cannot… Aj`ni je. It is like that. Dɑ `mɔʒe tʃy`læk i epɑngelmɑti`kɔ dɑ si To be able to get a professional one for `zøme. oneself as well. 190 191 295 Am ɑjne`koznu pɑk ɑj`sæ. But like that now. Kɑk go be zɑ`væxɔ? How was it called? Aishe Te sɑ, te sɑ ni prit`rivɑt. They are not, they are non-ironable. Sɑ `xubɑvi. They are good. Li gu `izvɑdem je pɑk ɑj`ni. And I take it as it is. 300 Nɑ Is`ketʃe vrit ɔt mi sɑ ni prit`rivɑt, li gi In Xanthi because all are non-ironable, I just u`prɑh… washed them… Fatme Tɔ je ɑj`ni Y. It is like that Y. A`gɑ je zɑ`kɑtʃenɑ dɑ je upe`reʃ i dɑ je When it is hanged you should wash it and zɑ`kɑtʃiʃ. you should hang it. 305 Aishe Aj`ni gi `stɔrix, xɔ. I did them like that, yes. Fatme A`lɑ ɑ`gɑ je upe`reʃ, dɑ je klɑ`deʃ `svitɑ But when you wash them, it cannot stay ni`mɔʒɔ dɑ se`di. if you put it folded. Aishe Ne ne ne… No no no… Fatme `Ɔti je sɑm jæ `mɑksus `drugɑ `ʒøtɑ Because I have done it on purpose the other 310 i`mæʃe… ones that I had… Iz`rezvɑx je. I was cutting them. Jæ je sɑm ɑj`sæ fɑf `deteʃtɑnɑ udɑ`jø I have hanged them in the kids’ zɑ`kɑtʃilɑ. room. 191 192 `Mɑksus je sɑm… On purpose I have… 315 Al ɑd ɑj`tɑm ɑ`prɑtɑ je sɑm But from there I have put them on purpose `klɑlɑ pɑk jæ `mɑksus zø dɑ je ud `krɑj washed but I took them and washed them ɑ`prɑx. anew. Dɑ je `mɔkrɑ. Let them be wet. Li zɑ`kɑtʃix, ni `rɑtʃi dɑ sɑ `pusne. When I hanged them, they cannot loosen. 320 Ut`kɑtʃenɑ se`dæ. They stayed unhanged. A`gɑ i`sɔxnɑ, jæ si je pɑk ɑ`kɑtʃix… When they dried, I again hanged them… Ne `puʃtɑ sɑ, kɑk, gɑ je… They do not loosen themselves, when… Pɑk ɑ`kɑ je zɑ`kɑtʃenɑ, dɑ je upe`reʃ, dɑ si je But if they are hanged, to wash them, to 324 zɑ`kɑtʃiʃ, tu`gɑs se`di… hang them back, then they stay… 192 193 APPENDIX RECORDING 7 Speakers: Mustafa (22) & Erkan (21) & Sabri (26) Topic: Casual Conversation – Funny Story – Scary Story Pomak dialects spoken: Thermes, Pachni Line/ Pomak English Translation Speaker 1 Sabri `Drugu kɑk`vɔ `imɑ ? What else is there ? Kɑk, kɑk vɑr`vi pu `Lɯʒenɑ ? How, how do things go in Thermes ? Mustafa Kɑ`nɑ dɑ vɑr`vi ɑj`tɑm ? What would go there? `Nemɑ `niʃtu. There is nothing. 5 Ni in`sɑn `nemɑ ni `niʃtu. Neither people or anything. Det`tsɑ `nemɑ. There are not children. Te sɑ u`tid--, pu Ala`mɑɲe. They are gon--, in Germany `Xɔdime ɑj`tɑm isse`dævɑme gu fkɑhve`nønɑ We go there we sit in the café for twenty jirmi`dørt sɑ`ɑt. four hours. 10 Erkan Tɔ i ne ɑj`ni si`me pu `selu, jirmi`ørt sɑ`ɑt We are like that too in the village, twenty pu… four hours in… Sabri Tɔ je `ɑjni ɑjtɑm, i ne `xɔdime… It is like that there, we too go… 193 194 Mustafa `Nemɑm `nitu televiz`jɔn `fkɑʃtɑnɑ, pɔ pɔ. I do not even have a TV in the house, my my. Sabri `Kvɔ je, `ʒentski `imɑli pu ɑj`tɑm ? How’s it, are there gemales there? 15 Kɑ`de sɑ ? Where are they? Mustafa Te sɑ vrit `fɑteni. They are all occupied. A`ku `mɔʒim dɑ `nɑjdim `nekɑf `ɔnytʃ If we can find some thirteen year jɑʃɯn`dɑ. old. Sabri `Kɑksu i vrit se`lɑ sɑ `drugi. Like all the other villages. 20 Mustafa A`fu, kɑ`nɑ. Since, what. `Drugunu du`xɑde, `xɔdi ɔn `ɔnbeʃ se`ne, The other comes, he goes fifteen years, `nemɑ gu pu `selu, `dɔjde, ɔt`tuz jɑʃɯndɑ, he is absent from the village, he comes, 30 ɔp `muʃkɑ nɑ `ɔnɑltɯ. years old, oh a young sixteen year old. `Jɑlɑ nɑ `mene. Come to me. 25 Erkan `Imɑ i pɑ`ri. He also has money. Mustafa Sɑ tɑ `ɔʒenem, `imɑm i pɑ`ri i `kɑʃtɑ sɑ I will wed you, I have money too and a `stɔrem, `jɑlɑ. house I will build, come. Sabri E ɑj`ni je `nemɑ, `nemɑ, vrit sɑ `fɑteni i pu Eh it is like that there aren’t, there aren’t, all 194 195 `drugise, `drugine se`lɑ. are occupied and in the other, the other villages. 30 Mustafa `Drugine `gɑlet `ɔniki jɑʃɯn`dɑ `dete vre. The others love/court a twelve year old child. `Kɑk gu `prɑvet? How do they do that? `Tʃekɑj, ɑjs`vɑ sɑ sɑ, sɑ nɑ`rɑste. Wait, this will, will grow up. Kɑ`nɑ sɑ nɑ`rɑste jæu ? What it will grow? Tɑ`mɑm. OK. 35 Sabri Jen`nɔ kirpi`ʒikɑ `bugyn `kɑzvɑʃe nɑ Today the internet said that a Gypsy woman `internetnu fɑf `Kriti ru`dilɑ je. has given birth. Mustafa Xɑ, xɑ, `ɔndørt jɑʃɯn`dɑ `dete i… Yes, yes, a fourteen year old child and… Sabri Us`tɑvilɑ gi je `mɑjkɑ xi dɑ `tʃyvɑt `detenu… Her mother has left them to look after the child… Emɔmi`ksiɑ. Incest. 40 Mustafa Xɔ, xɔ. Yes, yes. Sabri Ne brɑt xi, ne brɑt xi. Not her brother, not her brother. Mustafa Ne ɑs `brɑtɑn, ɑs… Not with her brother, with… Sabri `Ksɑðerfɔs li `nɔkɑk, `kɑti `tetjɔ. A cousin or something, something like that. 195 196 Aj`ni, `ɔnbir jɑʃɯn`dɑ, `ɣenise `ɔnbir Like that, eleven years old, she gave birth 45 jɑʃɯndɑ. eleven years old. I `vikɑ `mɑjkɑ xi je `nɔkɔlku jirmise`kiz, And it says that her mother is around twenty `bɑbɑ xi, jirmidɔ`kuz, `kɑti `tetjɑ. eight, her grandmother, twenty nine, something like those. Erkan `Tɑstɑmɑm. Perfect. Sabri `Imɑ `mlɔgu, `prɔjɑjɑ, `prɔprɔjɑjɑ. She has a lot, a great grandma, a great great grandma. 50 Mustafa Am sɑ xi `imɑ vrit, kɑ`nɑ ud `ɔnbir jɑʃɯn`dɑ. Well she will have all, what from eleven Kɑk mu`ʒi ? years old. How could she? `Brɑvɔ. Bravo. Sabri Tɔ i nɑ, i pu `nɑʃine se`lɑ, `miʃki `ɔti sɑ It is in, in our villages too, young because `ʒenet `ʒentskine zɑm, zɑm `kɑpɔs… they get married the girls then, then somehow… 55 Erkan Dɑ te sɑ ne vrit pɑk `fnɑʃine se`lɑ. Yes but they are not all in our villages. Mustafa `Nesɑ vrit ɑ`mɑ `prɑvet pɑk ɑjse`kivɑ `rɑbuti. They are not all but they again do this kind of things. Tɑ`mɑm `drugunu sɑ sɑ… OK the other has… Erkan Pɔ `mlɔgunu sɑ zɑglɑ`vævɑt `miʃki, `tʃækɑt Most get engaged young, wait to become dɑ `stɑnɑt nɑ `ɔnsekis, li `stɑnɑt li nɑ eighteen, just when they do become eighteen, 196 197 60 `ɔnsekis, `ɑjde. let’s go. Mustafa Nɑ ɑj`nɑi ili`kiɑ kɑ`nɑ dɑ, dɑ si `nɑjdime In that age what to, we should find now ɑjsæ`gɑnɑ `ɔnbir `ɔniki… eleven twelve… Erkan `Nɑjdisi nɑ… Do find… Mustafa Ɔd ɔttuz`beʃ dɑ sɑ `ɔʒenem, dɑ je hɑ`zɯr. To get married from thirty five, so that she be ready. 65 Erkan Nɑ `ɔnbeʃ si `nɑjdi jen`nɔ. Find a fifteen year old one. Mustafa Ajsæ`gɑnɑ `zdrɑvɑ jen`nɔ pɔ `xubɑfkɑ, Now a healthy and good one, gu`læmɑ je ɑjsæ`gɑ. now she is big. Sabri `Drugu M. ? What other M.? `Kɑʒi mi ut kɑ`gɑnu si bil `miʃek. Tell me from when you were little. 70 Erkan `Nækvɑ istɔ`riɑ. Some story. Sabri `Nækvɑ istɔ`riɑ. Some story. Mustafa Ku`gɑnu `beʃe `mutʃek iʃ`tæʃe dɑ `stɑnɑm When I was little I wanted to become a `pɑuer `rentzer i `skɑrʃisi glɑ`vɑsɑ. Power Ranger and I broke my head. 197 198 `Pɑnnɑ ud bɑ`rɑngɑ re eeej, dve met`rɑ ɑs I fell from a high place oohhh, two metres 75 glɑ`vɑsɑ nɑ`dɔl. with my head downwards. `Abi mi `vikɑʃe, `slezi vre, `slezi, sɑ `pɑnniʃ. My older brother said, get down, get down, you will fall. Nee, jæ sɑm `pɑuer `rein`dʒer, je sɑ Noo, I am a Power Ranger, I will `pɔvɑrtem i sɑ `stɑnɑm pɑk ɑs nu`gise. flip and I will stand on my feet again. `Nemɑm strɑx. I have no fear. 80 Neee. Nooo. Dɑ je `pɔdɑm nɑ `ɑnne. OK I am going to mother. Dɑ `vɑri. OK go. Aɑɑɑɑ… Ahhhh… U`tide i `setne i`zede i `sɔpɑtɑ i `dʒæbɑ gu He went and later I got the beating too and I 85 `stɔri. did in vain. Erkan I u`bi sɑ i `sɔpɑ. You both hurt yourself and got beaten too. Mustafa Jæ ti `kɑzɑ. I told you. Aɑ, dɑ. Ohh, yes. Sabri Ud `bɑteti ɑ? From your older brother eh? 90 Mustafa Xɔ. Ne ud `bɑte, ud `ɑnne, ɔt tæ sɑ `fkisnɑ. Yes. Not from my older brother, from mom, because she got angry. 198 199 Tɔ `ɑbi mi `kɑzɑ `zɑten. My older brother told me anyway. Sɑ `pɑnniʃ. You will fall. Kɑ`nɑ dɑ `stɔriʃ? What should you do? `Stɑnɑ pɑk. But it happen. 95 Erkan `Pɔmniʃli jæ si bex `skɔrʃil nu`gɔsɑ? Do you remember I had broken my leg? Sabri Tɑ`mɑm. OK. Erkan I ti, `nɔseʃe mɑ fɑf rɑ`kine. And you, he carried me in his arms. `Miʃki, jæ bex nɑ beʃ. Little ones, I was five. Ti nɑ `kɔlku be ? How old were you? 100 Sabri Dɔ`kus. Nine. Erkan Dɔ`kus. Nine. Sabri Dɔ`kus e`ki, dɔ`kuzbutʃyk. There nine, nine and a half. Jæ bex nɑ beʃ. I was five. Erkan I `nɔseʃe mɑ fɑf rɑ`kine ɑj`si. And he carried me in his arms like this. 105 Mustafa Ti si `skɑrʃil `nɔgɑtɑ ? You have broken your leg? 199 200 Erkan I`græxme… We were playing… Sabri Jen`nɔ `dete, `ʃixnɑl tɑ be. A kid, he had pushed you. Erkan Dɑ tʃi tɔ i`græxme. Yes but we were playing. Tɔ be, zɑpet`lɑl sɑ bex `nɔkɑk. It was, I had tripped somehow. 110 Sabri `Nɔkɑk ɑj`ni. Someway like that. Erkan Tɑr`tʃæxme ɑj`sikɑnɑ i… We were running like this and… Mustafa Jæ pet `pɑte `skɑrʃæl sɑm glɑ`vɑsɑ. I have broken my head five times. Erkan Kɑk? How? Mustafa Pet `pɑte `skɑrʃi glɑ`vɑsɑ. Five times I broke my head. 115 Erkan Kɑk`nɑ je pet `pɑte? What is five times? Sabri Kɑk`nɑ je ɑjn`vɑ ? What is that? Mustaf Pet jæu. Five. Erkan Dɑ tʃi dɑ pet. Yes OK five. 200 201 Erkan `Pɔte ? Ways? 120 Mustafa Aɑɑ ni `dumime Pu`mɑtsku ɑj`sæ, kɑ`nɑ Ahhh are we not talking Pomak now, what `prɑvime ? are we doing? Rɑ`zbirɑʃli sɑ ? Do you understand? Erkan Jæ sɑ rɑ`zbirɑm ɑ`lɑ ni `znɑjem kɑk`vɔ pɔt, I understand but I do not know what way, ti, ti enɔ`is ? what, what do you mean? 125 Mustafa Pet. Five. Erkan `Znɑjem jæu. I know. Mustafa Beʃ `pɑte rɑz`bix glɑ`vɑsɑ, stru`ʃi, kɑk gɔ Five times I broke my head, shattered it, how `vikɑt ? do they call it? Erkan `Pende xrɔ`nɔn ? Five years old? 130 Mustafa `Pende fɔ`res. Five times. Tɔ `pɑte ti si`meni ? Xrɔ`nɔn ? What does times mean? Years old? Sabri Tɔ `pɑte ðen tɔ… We do not have times… Erkan Ne ðen tɔ `exume. We do not have it. 201 202 Mustafa E`mis tɔ `exume, en`dɑksi. We have it, OK. 135 Sabri Aɑ ne gu `imɑme ut `Turtskunu. Ohh we have it from Turkish. Ke`re, beʃ ke`re. Times, five times. Ve `nɔkɑkvɔ pɔ si, pɔ si te `blize… You something more like, you are closer to... Erkan Ni `znɑjem, ve si te pɔ… I do not know, you are more… Mustafa Ne si`me pɔ Bul`gɑre si. We are more Bulgarian still. 140 Sabri `Imɑte gu `pɑte. You have it as times. Mustafa Tɔ si me nɑ bɑr`tʃinɑ ɑj`tɑm du Bulgɑ`rije. We are on a mountain there close to Bulgaria. Sabri I xɔ, `xɔditeli nɑ… And yes, do you go to… `Imɑte i ɑj`tɑm xɑ`mɑmve, `ðjɑfɔrɑ lut`rɑ. You also have there hamams, all kinds of hot springs. Mustafa `Imɑme. We have. 145 `Xubɑvi sɑ. They are good. Aj`sægɑ… Now… Sabri `Imɑ…du`xɑdetli in`sɑn ? There are…do people come? 202 203 Ku`gɑ du`xɑdet ? When do they come? Mustafa A xɑ, du`xɑdet. Yeah right, they come. 150 Tɔ ɑj`sægɑ ni du`xɑdet re. Now they do not come. Du`xɑdexɔ ud `ikɑnɑ ɑs `næekvi ki`nigi. They used to come from the Social Insurance Foundation (IKA) with some papers. De `znɑjem jæ kɑ`nɑ `prɑvexɑ, `stɑri zɑ dɑ Where should I know what they did, old `flizɑt `djæbɑ nɑ ɑj`tɑminɑ. people to enter there freely. Vɑsi`kɑ `nitu di`xɑdet ni `niʃtu. Basically they do not come nor anything. 155 Ajsæ`gɑ ɑ`ku `dɔjdɑt dve tri pɑ`rei `kserɔ ɣɔ. Now two or three groups of people if they come… Sabri Dɑ. Ni du`xɑdet, prɑ`vimi sɑ i nɑ Edre`les pu Yes. Do they not come, I think on the day of ɑjnu`gɑs ɑ`gɑnu ? Edreles somewhere then too? Mustafa E Edre`les `imɑ… Eh there is in Edreles… Erkan Eelen`dʒø… A celebration… 160 Sabri Du`xɑdet `pulmi ut `tsælu Jy`nɑnɑs. Buses come from all Greece. Mustafa I `pulmi i ɑ`fu… And buses and because… Tæl si ne… Have you not… A`fu si du`xɑdel. Since you have been. 203 204 Sabri Ajnu`gɑs `trævɑ dɑ `imɑ… That time there must be… 165 Ne, ne, zɑ tɔ, zɑ tɔ `vikɑm, `kɑzvɑj. No, no, that’s why, that’s why I say, tell. Mustafa E kɑ`nɑ dɑ `kɑzvɑm ? What to tell? `Kɑzvɑj ti. You tell. Erkan `Kɑzvɑj. Tell. `Sitʃkutu `kɑʒi. Tell everything. 170 Mustafa A`fu…`znɑjiʃ. Since…you know. Tæl jæ `trevɑ dɑ vi `kɑzvɑm? Do I have to tell you? Tɔ i ɑjsæ`gɑ `nemɑ pɑk `jættse i in`sɑn i There aren’t many people now too and nɑ`vɑne. outside. `Nemɑ hitʃ `kinisi. There is no movement at all. 175 S. je ɑj`tɑm. S. is there. Dve tri, dve tri det`tsɑ ku tu, ɑ`ku `idɔt ud Two three, two three children like, if they go `nɑʃine se`lɑ ɑj`tɑminɑ dɑ ispi`jæt `næʃtu. there from our villages so as to drink something. Ajn`vɑ je, `drugu `niʃtu. That is it, nothing else. `Setne, i ɑf `nɑʃynu `selu `jættse sɑ din`dɑr tɑ Then, in our village people are very religious 180 ni `mɔʒim, ni `piet `jættse. too and we cannot, we do not drink a lot. 204 205 Erkan Ni pi`jøt, ni pi`jøt nɑ ɑ`tʃɯk. They do not drink, they do not drink in an open space. Sabri `Nemɑ, hɑs `imɑ `tetjɔ… There isn’t, really there is such thing… Mustafa `Veveɑ. Certainly. Sabri Kɔr`kuje zɑ dɑ gi ni `videt ? Fear not to be seen? 185 Mustafa Lɔɣɔkri`siɑ. Censorship. Sabri E ɑj`ni je gɑ `næknɑ ɑj`si pɔ, ɑpɑɣɔrev`menɔ Well it is like that when something like this ut `selunu re, ɑj`ni de`mek… is more, prohibited from the village, like that, that is… Mustafa Te gu sɑ `stɔrili ɑpɑɣɔrev`menɔ. They have made it prohibited. Sabri Dɑ ti ni `dɑvɑt… To not let you… 190 Apɑɣɔrev`menɔ ut `selunu, de`mek. Prohibited from the village, that is. Usiɑsti`kɑ ɔt ʃe tɑ `videt se, ɑj`ni `strɑx tɑ je, In essence because they will see you, you are zɑ tɔ. afraid like that, because of that. Aj`ni ɑpɑɣɔrev`menɔ ne nɑ hɑs. Prohibited like that not in reality. Mustafa Aɑ `imɑʃ… Ehh you have… 195 Kɑk gɔ `vikɑt ? How do they call it? 205 206 Tʃeki`nijɔsun dɑ gu `stɔriʃ. You distance yourself from doing it. Sabri Pu `nɑʃynu `selu pɑk `nemɑ ɑjne`kɑznɑ In our village though, there is no such `rɑbutɑ. thing. Erkan Ne, te si, te si pɔ `mlɔgunu `glødɑt `rɑbutɑnɑ No, they, most of them mind their own 200 ðilɑ`ði hitʃ. business, that is. Mustafa Ajn`vɑ `nemɑme ne. We do not have that. Sabri Fɑf vrit dy`cænene i `stɑru dɑ tɑ `vidi `nemɑ In all shops even if an old man sees you it ɑjn`vɑ… is not like that… Erkan Ne, `mɔʒe dɑ `kɑʒe, ku tɑ `vidi `nækvu `stɑru No, he might tell, if a known old man sees 205 pu`znɑtu `mɔʒe dɑ `kɑʒe bu`bɑjkuti. you he might tell your father. Mustafa Te ɑjsæ`gɑ i `mutʃkine re… And now the little ones too… A`ku si `mlɑdu… If you are young… Te ɑjsæ`gɑ i `mlɑdine sɑ dɑ viʃ zɑ `sɔpɑ Now the young too, you should see them, ɑ`mɑ zɑ `sɔpɑ sɑ. they need a beating, but a beating they need. 210 U`din den se `stɑne `næʃtu ɑ`mɑ… One day something will happen but… Hɑs vre, vrit sɑ. Really, they all need it. 206 207 Erkan Kɑ`nɑ ? What? Mustafa Ee vrit sɑ, zɑ vrit `rɑbuti… Ehh all need, all need things… Erkan `Dumet ? They talk? 215 Mustafa Xɔ, xɔ. Yes, yes. Aj`sɔi je uti`ʃøl ɑj`tɑm, ɑ`vidi gu ɑ`vidi gu. This one has gone there, look at him look at him. Aɑ ɑjs`vɑ je ne `xubɑvɔ. Ahh this is not good. Erkan E `glødɑj si `rɑbutɑ. Mind your business. Sabri Mɯzɯr`lɯk. Gossip. 220 Erkan Hɯn`dzɯr. Hɯn`dzɯre. Pig. Pigs. Sabri `Seleʃti `rɑbuti. Village things. Nɑ ɑj`læk sɑ, `nemɑt kɑ`nɑ dɑ `prɑvet, They are carefree, they do not have `glødɑt `tebe. something to do, they look at you. Erkan `Jydi `imɑteli ve fɑf `vɑʃynu `selu ? `Jydi ? Do you have yudi (i.e. supernatural female entity) in your village? Yudi? 225 Mustafa Kɑk`nɑ je ɑjn`vɑ ? What is that? 207 208 Erkan `Jydɑ. Yuda. Mustafa `Jydɑ kɑ`nɑ je ? What is yuda? Erkan Jen`nɔ kɑ`tu in`sɑn ɑ`lɑ sɑs kri`lɑ. A thing like a human with wings. Sabri `Ʒeni re. Women. 230 Erkan `Ʒenɑ sɑs kri`lɑ, `fɔrkɑ. A woman with wings, flying. Mustafa Nɑ, nɑ me `pɑi `ɔtɑn per`nɑɔ ɑpɔ ki. I am really scared when I walk through there. Dɑ zɑ`fɑti dɑ `ʃætɑ. When it starts to move. Erkan `Mene nɑ`preʃ mɑ be `jættse strɑx niz I was very much afraid when we pass mezɑr`lɯtsine niz `nɑʃynu `selu ɑ`gɑ through graveyards through our village 235 pri`minɑme ɔt sɑ `vɔtre fɑf `selunu… because they are inside the village… Mustafa Jæ, `ɔʃte mɑ je strɑx. Me, I am still afraid. Jæ ni `mɔgɑ ɑj`ni. I cannot like that. Erkan `Vɔtre, ɑ`lɑ ɑj`sæ mɑ je hitʃ ne strɑx. Inside, but now I am not at all afraid. Aj`sæ `premnɑm, kɑtu`gɑ hitʃ `nemɑ Now I pass, as if there is nothing at 208 209 240 `nikɑkvɔ. all. Sabri Tɔ je ne `xubɑvu dɑ sɑ, mezɑr`lɯtsine dɑ sɑ.. It is not good to be, for graveyards to be… Erkan Dɑ tʃi `nemɑ `nækvu. Yes but there is nothing. Tʃi tɔ sɑ um`ræti, tɔ `nemɑ `næknɑ. But they are dead, there is nothing. Sabri Ne, ɑm de`mek, `glødɑj `drugise… No, but so, you look at the other… 245 Mustafa Um`ræti sɑ ɑ`lɑ… They are dead but… Sabri `Drugi se kɑk… The others how… Erkan Pri nɑm sɑ pɑk. They are close to us again. Sabri Hyky`mete ɑj`si pu Ev`rɔpi, pɔ si gi `imɑt, pɔ Countries like this in Europe, they have them ɑj`rɯ ɑj`si. more, more separate like this. 250 Tɑ`mɑm. OK. Erkan Dɑ ɑ`lɑ… Yes but… Sabri Us`tɑnɑli sɑ `vɔtre `fpɔlisnu. They have remained inside the cities. Erkan Fɑf `vɑʃynu `selu `tæli sɑ `vɔtre `fselunu ? In your village are they inside the village? 209 210 Mustafa `Imɑ i fɑf `vɔtre `fselu `imɑ i iz`vɑn. There are both inside the village and there are outside. 255 Ajsæ`gɑ `prɑvet `drugu, `nɔvu, pɔ ud`tzɑt. Now they are doing another, a new one, more to the back. Erkan `Fnɑʃynu nɑj `mlɔgunu sɑ `vɔtre. In ours most are inside. Sabri `Vɔtre. Inside. Tɔ sɑ us`tɑvili. They have left. Zɑbu`rɑvili sɑ `drugunu `ʒønu iz`vɔn, ɑjn`vɑ. They have forgotten the one outside, that one. 260 Erkan Xɔ. Ni pu`gribɑt `nikugɑ. Yes. They never bury. Sabri `Ine, ɑj`si se, kɑk gɑ je nɑ… It is, like this, how is it when… Zi`mɔs `ɔti je i mɑf i hɑ`vɔnɑ, ɑjn`vɑ, i In the winter because the weather is terrible `nemɑ i in`sɑn ɑj`si pu ɑj`sæ, `drugunu ɑ`gɑ i too, that, and there aren’t people too this `glødɑ ɑjn`vɑ, `mɔʒe dɑ, nɑ tu `pefti i time, the other person when they see too 265 `ðjɑθesi, `kɑpɔs`etsi. that, he might, his mood might fall, something like this. `Nemɑ in`sɑn, `nemɑ ɑjne`kɔznu, `glødɑ There aren’t people, there isn’t that, he ɑj`tɑm i mezɑr`lɯtsi, zɑ tɔ `ine `kɑpɔs. watches there graveyards too, for that it is a bit strange. Erkan Bɯn`nɯʃ `tʃyvɑl sɑm, sɑ `skrivɑt ɑj`si. I have heard sometimes, people hide there like this. Nɑ`preʃ pɔ `jættse. In the past more often. 210 211 270 `Deti sɑ `skrivɑt fɑf mezɑr`lɯtsine sɑs `miʃkɑ Kids hide in the graveyards with a small `lɑmbinkɑ, gø kɑn`diltʃe. lamp, as if a small light. `Znɑjiʃ kɑk`vɔ je kɑn`diltʃe ? You know what a small light is? `Ʒønu gø kɑ`tu `lɑmbinkɑ se`di, i ɑ`gɑ The one that stays like a small lamp, and pri`minɑ bun`nɔ, gu `glødɑ ɑjn`vɑ i strɑx gu when someone passes, he looks at that and 275 je. je is afraid. A`lɑ ɑj`sæ gu ni `prɑvet. But now they do not do it. Mustafa Tɔ ɑd`in `dete, mɑ`lɑkɑ, `stɔri gu re. One kid, friend, he did that. U`tide tɑ gu `stɔri fɑf mezɑrl— He went and did it in the gravey— `Denu mezɑr`lɯkɑn, u`tide tɑm ɔrtɑ`dɑ, Where the graveyard is, he went right in the 280 `sænne, i `drugi, `tʃækɑ `drugine dɑ si `idɑt centre, he sits, and others, he waits for others nɑ `kɑʃtɑnɑ ni `znɑjem kɑ`nɑ. to go to their houses I do not know what. Ku`gɑnu privɑ`løt, tɔ nɑ`vɑle `lɑmpɑnɑ, When they pass by, he lights the lamp, kɑn`diltʃenu. the small light. `Klɑvɑ gu po nɑ ɑj`tukɑ, tɑ ni `znɑjem kɑ`nɑ. He puts it there, and I do not know what. 285 I ɑs `ptʃelɑ kɑk gu `vikɑt ɑjs`vɑ? And with a bee how do they call this? Erkan Tʃel`mɔ. Fez. Mustafa Tʃel`mɑ, xɑ ɑs ɑjn`vɑ, i ɑj`sɑi. Fez, yes that, and this. 211 212 Se`di. He sits. 289 Pɔ `drugine dɑ `vidiʃ, mɑ`lɑkɑ. Ohh you should see the others, [dude]. 212 213 APPENDIX RECORDING 8 Speakers: Salih (56), Aishe (51), & Sabri (26) Topic: Social Event Pomak dialect spoken: Pachni Line/ Pomak English Translation Speaker 1 Aishe Tʃim ɑ`læ Ser`ver, dɑ je kɑk, dɑ sɑ kɑk`viʃte Well look Server, be it how, be they in`sɑn ɑ`gɑ je `duʃe zɑ `sækɔgɑ mi je be`læ. whatever people when it is a soul we are upset for anybody. Tɔ je `sækutrɔ sɑs `duʃe. Everyone is with a soul. A`gɑ `imɑ i `deti pɑk pɔ `jættse mi sɑ And when there are also kids it saddens us 5 smi`lævɑt. even more. E i te sɑ… Well and they are with… Salih Si`rɑtsi ɑ`gɑ sɑ pɑk `jættse je `lɔʃy. Orphans when they are it is very bad. `Mɑjkɑmu, mu sɑ je pri`bilɑ, bu`bɑykɑn mu Its mother, has been killed its father has been sɑ je pri`bil … killed… 10 Aishe Nɑ teli`ɔrɑsi su gi `glødɑme i be`læ mi je… We see them in the TV and we are upset… Salih `Glɑdɑnki sɑ us`tɑnɑli. They have remained hungry. `Vɔdɑ `nemɑ `tsistɑ, tɔ mi sɑ je ud`bɑvilu i There is no clear water, and their water has 213 214 vu`dɔtɑ pu ɑj`tɑm i `sækɑkvɔ tu. been destroyed in those places and all. `Mɔtʃet ut `sækɑde dɑ mi `zbirɑt `nækɑf They try from all places to gather for them 15 jɑr`dɯm, `pɔmuʃ. some help, an assistance. `Rekɑxɑ `selusu dɑ sɑ zbe`reme i ne dɑ The village said we should get too and `stɔrime je`din jɑr`dɯm. do something for help. Kɑk ʃe `pɑnnɑt pɔ `mlɔgu pɑ`ritse ? How is more money going to fall? Dɑ `stɔrime ker`mes. To do a fundraising. 20 Ker`mes kɑk`nɑ ʃe `kɑʒe ? What does it mean a fundraising event? Vrit ku`trɔ kɑk`nɑ nu `imɑ, ni kullɑn`disvɑ Everyone whatever they have, they do not gu ɑ`lɑ si je `nɔfku fɑz`lɔ, mu dɑ gu izne`se use it but it is still a lot new, to take it ud`vɔn… outside… Aishe Dɑ sɑ pru`dɑvɑ… To be sold… 25 Salih Su`kɑkɑn ɑj`tɑm `selunu. The alley there in the village. Nɑ sre`de `selunu, ɑj`tɑm, dɑ sɑ xɑ`retʃkɑ… In the center of the village, there, to be auctioned… Dɑ sɑ ser`gije dɑ `stɑne, kɑ`tu pɑ`zɑr. For an auction to be done, like a bazaar. Dɑ sɑ pru`dɑvɑ. To be sold. Dɑ mu sɑ klɑ`de je`din fi`jæt. For a price to be set. 30 Ajs`vɑ`jetukɔlku, ɑjn`vɑ `jetukɔlku. This this much that that much. In`sɑnɑn gu `dɑvɑt xɑ`risɑnu. The people give it for free. 214 215 Aj`tɑm `flizɑ je`din fi`jæt, zɑm `ɔti sɑ `znɑje There a price is set, then because it is known zɑ kɑk`nɑ je, `drugunu ɑj`nevɑ pɑ`ri ʃe dɑ`de. what that is for, the other person will give that money. Fi`jætɑn ʃe dɑ`de. He will pay the price. 35 Ku `imɑ fɑz`litsɑ, i `fɑzlitsɑ ʃe dɑ dɑ`de `ɔti If there is spare left, the spare that is left too `znɑje tʃi nɑx ɑj`tɑm ʃe dɑ `ide… he will give because he knows that they will go there… Aishe `Sækutrɔ dɑ mu i ni `trævɑ `mɔtʃi dɑ `kupi Everybody even if they do not need anything `næknɑ tu`gɑs ɑj`tɑm… tries to buy something then there… Salih Dɑ re`tʃeme ɑj`se jæ `imɑm jen`nɔ ku`vertɑ. Let’s say now I have a blanket. 40 Ku`vertɑnɑ `mɔʒe dɑ `prɑvi ɔt`tuz ev`rɔ ɑ`lɑ The blanket may be worth thirty euros but I jæ `nemɑm ɔt`tuz ev`rɔ dɑ dɑm `suxi pɑ`ri do not have thirty euros to give as dry cash ɑj`tɑm. there. `Dɑvɑm ku`vertɑnɑ ɔt`tuz ev`rɔ i tɔ ɑj`tɑm I give the blanket thirty euros and he there mi `klɑvɑ fi`jæɑt ɔt`tuz dɑ re`tʃeme `ili jir`mi. sets a price of thirty let’s say or twenty. 45 Pru`dɑvɑsɑ ku`vertɑnɑ. The blanket is sold. `Zimɑ je je`din. Someone buys it. A`læj gi ɔt`tuz ev`rɔ ud ɑj`tɑm. Here are thirty euros from there. Un`nelsɑm i jen`ni jeme`nije. I have also taken there a pair of shoes. `Zglødɑxɑmisɑ `xubɑvi ɑ`lɑ ɑj`sæ gi kɑ`tu ni They looked fine to me but now I kind of do 50 been`disvɑm `nɔkɑkvɔ. not like them something. 215 216 `Dɑvɑm gi i tæx ɑj`tɑm i ud ɑj`tɑm ɔn ev`rɔ. I give them too there and from there ten euros. `Stɑnɑxɑ `kɯrk ev`rɔ. They became forty euros. I `drugunu ɑj`ni i `pɔdrugunu ɑj`ni… And the other like that and the one after… Aishe Tʃi ɑ`læ `kɑksu i ne ɑj`tuvɑ `pɔrvet den Well like us too the first day we 55 `stɔrixme. made. `Stɑnɑlɑ sɑm jæ dørt tu pu`minɑʃe I have woken up at a quarter past tʃej`rek. four. I bu`bɑbjkuti rɑzbu`dix. I woke your father too. Ut kɑk nɑgu`dix, u`mesix ɑj`tɑm. After I made, I baked there. 60 `Iʃtɑm dɑ `stɔrem, `ɔti `rekɑxɑ i je`mekvu dɑ I want to make, because they said and `nɔset `sækutrɔ i tɔ ʃe sɑ pru`dɑvɑ. something edible for everybody to bring that to will be sold. Jæ ɑpɔ`fɑsisɑ dɑ `stɔrem ti`rɔpiti. I decided to make cheesepies. Bu`bɑjkuti rɑzbu`dix dɑ mi pu`mɑgɑ. I woke your father to help me. Ti si `spæʃe. You were still sleeping. 65 Ni `vide `nikɑknɑ. You did not see anything. I du sɑ`bɑlɑxin du se`kiz `stɔrixme gi. And by eight o’clock in the morning we made them. Is`pekɑxɑ sɑ. They got cooked. Jyz ti`rɔpiti un`nesɑxme. A hundred cheesepies we took there. `Kɑksu `tʃyxme, pu el`li lep`tɑ gi sɑ As we heard, they were selling them for fifty 216 217 70 pru`dɑvɑli. cents. Jyz ti`rɔpiti pu el`li lep`tɑ el`li ev`rɔ. A hundred cheesepies by fifty cents makes fifty euros. `Pɔrvet den se jæ `stɔrix ud nɑm kɑk`nɑsu. The first day is what I made from us. Ikin`dʒitu den pɑk `stɔrix kɑri`dɔpitɑ. The second day I made a nutpie. Salih `Kolku bexa kari`dopitine ? How many were the nutpies? 75 Aishe Kari`dopitite be`xa jir`mi par`tʃe. The nutpies were twenty pieces. Pu bir bu`tʃyk, ot`tus ev`ro `pravet. By one and a half, they make thirty. `Stanaxa sek`sen ud nam. They became eighty from there. Zam `setne pak i`mæx sva`renu ud ɣli`ko tu Then later I had cooked spoon kuta`ʎu `ʒøsu `smokvi. sweets the one with figs. 80 I pru`vodix… And I sent… Salih `Smokvi i… Figs and… Aishe Ax`laðja kak, `dule. And pears, quince. Salih I ud `dule i`mæʃe. There was from quince too. Salih I ud `dule i`mæʃe. There was from quince too. 85 Aishe `Zøxme i stragis`to `mlæku pak i pa`nitʃki We got strained yoghurt too and small 217 218 aj`si, aj`ni, `kupa… containers like this, cups… Salih Mjas `xriseos. Single use. Aishe Mjas `xriseos. Single use. `Kladaxme `mlæku stragis`to i var`xu pu We added strained youghurt and on top 90 jen`no `smokva. one fig. Salih Fsre`de jen`no `smokva. In the centre a fig. Aishe Fsre`de i… In the center and… Salih Pris `krajjenu… In the sides… Aishe Ut `dule. From quince. 95 Salih Ut `dule. From quince. Aishe Se`dæ `kamatnu `jættse. It looked very beautiful. I to `onaltɯ par`tʃe iz`lezaxa. That too turned out sixteen pieces. Pu `bir butʃyk `kolku `stanvat? By one and a half what does it make? Sabri Ni `znajem, jæ ni z`najem. Don’t know, I do not know. 100 218 219 Aishe Sek`sen be`xa. They were eighty. I `onaltɯ pu bir bu`tʃyk kseper`nane `jysnu And sixteen by one and a half surpass a ev`ro. hundred euros. Xo, `kolkunu je se akri`vos ðe bo`ro na Yes, how much exactly it is I cannot `ksero. know. 105 Salih Jirmi`dørt `pravet be, jirmi`dørt `pravet. They make twenty four, twenty four they make. I sek`sen, `jyzdørt. And eighty, a hundred and four. Aishe Xo, i `drugi `rabuti bex `dala aj`si… Yes, and other things I had given like this… Salih `Dripvu, ajte`kova… Clothing, that kind… Aishe Tʃer`ʃæfe, `dripvu, ajne`kiva `rabuti. Sheets, clothing, that kind of things. 110 Nax `jyzelli pis`tevo ʃe sa utiʃ`li. I believe they will have gone to a hundred and fifty. A`la jæ pa`ri da gi dam… But for me to give that as money… Salih Ku mi bexa rek`li `jyzelli da da`deme `ili jyz, If they had told us to give a hundred and ni`mæxme da da`deme ajnu`gava, jys. fifty or a hundred, we would not have given then, a hundred. Aishe Pak aj`ni a`ga gu `pravet `xubavu je. But when they do it that way it is good. 115 I `sækom-- `sækutro `motʃi da `kupi. And every—everyone tries to buy. 219 220 I jæ pak sam ud `drugade ku`povala, ud And I have bought from others, from others `drugi kak`nanu sa `davali i… what they were giving and… Sabri `Kolku `rekaxme sa sa `zbrali ? How much did we say was collected? Aishe `Zbrali sa sa jir`mi… Twenty were collected… 120 Salih Jirmii`ki but`ʃyk bin. Twenty two thousand. Sabri Xmm, `mlogu. Hmm, a lot. Salih Jirmii`ki but`ʃyk bin ev`ro. Twenty two and a half thousand euros. Sabri A`la gu za `miʃku `selu. But for a small village. Za, za, `miʃku `selu ja ta lef`ta. For, for, a small village for that money. 125 Salih To je ne `jættse `miʃku a`la za `naʃysu `selu. It is not very small but for our village. A`læ Ge`tʃebunar, onje`di bin ta ud tus ud Look at Glafki, seventeen thousand from tam `drugi pak, ta gi sa jir`mi bin na`vorʃili. here other from there, and they have rounded them twenty thousand. Ne, bir`den, sas jen`no `kinisi, jirmii`ki Us, at once, with a single move, twenty two bu`tʃyk bin. and a half thousand. 130 Sa `mlogu pa`ri. They are a lot of money. Xo. Yes. 220 221 Sabri Kak pri`karaxte? Aj`nes `dene. How did you pass those days? Those days. Salih Am be `xubavu `oti i ut `drugi se`la `dojdaxa. Well it was good because people from other villages came too. Ka`tu je`din pana`ir `stana aj`tam. It happened sort of like a feast. 135 Aishe `Xubavu be ʃe. It was good. `Vritem beʃe `dragu `oti i `znajet tʃi, `iʃtat da Everyone was glad because they knew that, pu`mognat ta, tʃi aj`nes pa`ri za `xubavu. they want to help, that that money is for good. Salih `Ot je za `xubavu. Because it is for good. Za `xubaf se`bep aj`ni. For a good cause like that. 140 Sabri Zam si i `nema i `nækna pu se`lasa, aj`si Then there isn’t something in these villages, `kaksu `vikaʃ, pana`ir `nekakof. like this as you say, some kind of a feast. Salih Xo. Yes. `Nemame si gu ne. We do not have that. Sabri `Nekva efke`ria za da sa zbe`re `kosmos za Some opportunity for people to get together 145 `nækna se aj`ni. for something like that. Aishe In`ʃallax. Hopefully [/God willing]. 221 222 Na `porvu `stanva faf `selusu aj`ni pak, It happens for the first time in the village `xubavu `stana pak. like that but, but it happened well. Salih Xo be. Yes. 150 Sabri To `jalnɯs `xatimve `stanva efke`ries da sa Only in hatims [religious celbrations] `zbirvat aj`si `kosmos ta za to i u`retsna. opportunites for people to get together happen and that is why they liked it. Salih `Xatim, `nekaf kur`ban. A hatim, some sacrifice. To `stanva `jættse faf `mlogu `vreme. It happens very frequently. Aishe A`la jæ `værvam ut`tsæ ʃe `pravet. But I believe they will be making from now on. 155 To se du`ga na jen`nɯʃ da `stane `moʒe. Maybe it is until it happens for a first time. Salih E to je `sitʃkunu aj`ni. Well everything is like that. Du`ga da mu `fatet tʃe`lɯman zan tu`gas Until they get skilled at it then 158 alɯʃ`tisvat in`sanan. people get used to it. 222